Document
2016
OWNER’S MANUAL
Viper
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2015 FCA US LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
1
4 INTRODUCTION
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techCongratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC
nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about
vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanyour satisfaction.
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against
operating procedures that could result in a collision,
bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS
against procedures that could result in damage to your
vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual,
you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from
Vehicle Identification Number
outside the vehicle through the windshield. This number NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
also appears on the top surface of the right-hand side
tunnel frame rail near the center of the vehicle, the
outboard facing surface of the right-hand side B-Pillar
frame rail, as well as the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the
vehicle registration, and the title.
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .13 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .20
䡵 SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ To Unlock The Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ To Unlatch The Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM . . . . . . .17
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .23
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .47
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .84
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
▫ Auto-Down Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
▫ AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection .30
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
▫ Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
NOTE: In case the ignition does not change with the
push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system have a low or dead battery.
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Keyless Push Button Ignition.
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Keyless Enter-N-Go Feature
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go
ignition feature.
Keyless Push Button Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with
the push of a button, as long as the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating
Keyless Push Button Ignition
positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and 1 — OFF
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start 2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
RUN will illuminate.
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
You can keep the emergency key with you when valet
parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
NOTE: In the event that the FOB does not start the
vehicle (⬙FOB not Found⬙ message) use the FOB nose
(furthest point from key ring) and push the start button.
FOB replaces the finger.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
— RKE Liftgate Button
— RKE Door Unlock Button
— RKE Door Lock Button
— RKE PANIC Alarm Button
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
NOTE: With the Uconnect system, the power window
switches, radio and power outlets will remain active for
up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. The time for this feature is programmable. Refer
to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Emergency Key Removal
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake, turn the
engine OFF, remove the key fob from the ignition
and lock your vehicle. If equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless ignition
node is in “OFF” mode, remove the Key Fob from
the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the Key Fob from vehicle, place the
ignition in the OFF position and lock all doors when
leaving the vehicle unattended.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
by the party responsible for compliance could void the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
indicates that there is a problem with the system. In
SENTRY KEY
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents unauthor- it indicates that someone tried to use an invalid Key Fob
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation the engine being shut off after two seconds.
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
or unlocked.
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the system.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Push Button Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
Ignition and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized possible by an authorized dealer.
vehicle operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are
programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine
to crank with an invalid Key Fob.
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
• Do not make modifications or alterations to the
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
security protection.
• The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
NOTE: Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programAll of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have ming a blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Key Fob is one that has never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
dealer.
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
Replacement Keys
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
Customer Key Programming
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors, liftgate,
performed at an authorized dealer.
and hood for unauthorized entry and the ignition for
unauthorized operation. If something triggers the alarm,
General Information
the Vehicle Security Alarm will prevent the vehicle from
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio starting. It will also sound the horn and flash the park
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
lights, and taillights.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and Rearming Of The System
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
(flashing lights) after 15 minutes, and then rearm itself.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Push the LIFTGATE
release button on the RKE
transmitter
twice
to
allow
access without triggering
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
the alarm or having to disarm the Vehicle Security
1. Make sure the vehicle ignition system is in the ⬙OFF⬙ Alarm. Then, within 30 seconds, open the liftgate by
position.
using the key cylinder or the LIFTGATE release switch
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the located in the exterior liftgate handle.
vehicle:
To Disarm The System
button on the interior power The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
• Push the LOCK
door lock switch with the driver and/or passen- the following methods:
ger door open.
button on the Remote Keyless
• Push the LOCK the
button on the Remote • Push the UNLOCK
Entry
(RKE)
transmitter.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
3. If any doors are open, close them.
position:
Entering The Liftgate With The System Armed
• Push the Keyless Enter-N-Go Start/Stop button (requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
NOTE: Using the key to open the liftgate while the
Vehicle Security Alarm is armed will trigger the alarm.
To Arm The System
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Keyless Enter-N-Go Start/Stop Button
NOTE:
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Tamper Alert
• The liftgate key cylinder cannot arm or disarm the
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
Vehicle Security Alarm.
your absence, the horn will sound three times, and the
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
Power Door Lock switches will not unlock the doors. Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Electronic Immobilization System
• A door is unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
The Electronic Immobilization system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The The interior lights will turn on, remain on for about four
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation seconds, and then fade to off if a door is opened using the
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked inside door handle.
or unlocked.
NOTE: None of the courtesy lights will operate if the
dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
downward position), unless the overhead map/reading
The interior lights will turn on whenever a door is lights are turned on manually.
opened or the liftgate is opened and the dimmer switch is
not in the defeat position.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The interior lights will turn on, remain on for approxi- The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors
mately 30 seconds, and then fade to off if any of the and liftgate, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances
following occur:
up to approximately 66ft (20 m) using a hand-held Key
Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not
• A door is opened using the outside door handle and
need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
then closed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
and the illuminated entry system will turn on. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
will illuminate in
NOTE: The Door Unlock Indicator
the instrument cluster when one or both doors are
unlocked.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/Both Doors First
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
To Unlock The Doors
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
button on the RKE transmitter. To change
UNLOCK
the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Push and release the UNLOCK
button on the RKE
Flash Lights With Lock
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice to
unlock both doors and the liftgate. The park lights and This feature lets you program the lights to flash when the
turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the signal, doors are locked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
transmitter. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under- To Lock The Doors
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Push and release the LOCK
button on the RKE
transmitter to lock the doors. The horn will chirp once,
Unlock On 1st Press
and the park lights and turn signal lights will flash to
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
acknowledge the signal.
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
button on the RKE transmitter. To change Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
UNLOCK
the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
information.
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
Autolock
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
This vehicle is equipped with Autolock. If the vehicle is
unlocked while the Key Fob is outside the vehicle and the To Unlatch The Liftgate
door is not opened for 30 seconds, the car will relock.
button on the RKE transmitter
Push the LIFTGATE
two times within five seconds to unlatch the liftgate.
Push and hold the liftgate release button while pulling
up on the trunk/hatch to open.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Using The Panic Alarm
Programming Additional Transmitters
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
button on the RKE transmitter for at
the PANIC
least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is
on, the headlights will turn on, the park lights will
flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior
lights will turn on.
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless NOTE:
button a
you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
(24 km/h) or greater.
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
NOTE: The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the
housing or the printed circuit board.
ignition switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while
the Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights 1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
and horn will remain on.
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
other hand.
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Emergency Key Removal
Separating The RKE Transmitter Case
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade 3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
the seal during removal.
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two Gulf Coast Countries (GCC)
halves together.
Key Fob
General Information
Registered NO: ER36613/15
The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio
Dealer NO: DA36975/14
Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RFHUB
with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Registered NO: ER36600/15
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Dealer NO: DA36975/14
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
KIN
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op- Registered NO: ER0113955/13
eration.
Dealer NO: 0019345/09
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Do not touch the exhaust pipe sill covers when
entering or exiting your vehicle. They can be hot
enough to burn you. Observe the warning labels on
each door closure panel.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake, turn the
engine OFF, remove the key fob from the ignition
and lock your vehicle. If equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless ignition
node is in “OFF” mode, remove the Key Fob from
the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always cycle the ignition
to the OFF mode lock, and lock your vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
severe personal injuries and death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
injured seriously or fatally. Don’t leave the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each door trim panel. Use
this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
2
Power Door Lock Switch
If you push the power door lock switch
while the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any
front door is open, the power locks will not operate.
This prevents you from accidentally locking the Key
Fob in the vehicle. Cycling the ignition to the OFF
position or closing the door will allow the locks to
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
operate. If a door is open, and the ignition is in the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
ACC or ON/RUN position, a chime will sound as a The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
reminder to remove the Key Fob.
power door locks if:
NOTE: The Door Unlock Indicator
will illuminate in
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enthe instrument cluster when one or both doors are
abled.
unlocked.
2. The driver door is opened.
Automatic Door Locks
3. The doors were not previously unlocked.
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). The To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect Setauto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
authorized dealer per written request of the customer. further information.
Please see your authorized dealer.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
There are single window controls on the passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door window.
Power Windows
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
The window controls on the driver’s door control both of is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
the door windows.
The power window switches will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WINDOWS
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
Power Window Switches
(Continued)
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
Auto-Down Feature
AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
auto-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent, and release it when you want the window
to stop.
Both power window switches have an AUTO-down NOTE:
feature. Push the window switch to the second detent, • If the window runs into any obstacle during autorelease, and the window will go down automatically.
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
To open the window part way, push the window switch
switch again to close the window.
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autoclosure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
• If the window detects an obstacle 10 times in a row, the 2. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
auto–up feature unlearns.
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Reset Auto-Up
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
LIFTGATE
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window The liftgate can be unlocked or locked by the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, the manual lock cylinmay need to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
der located on the rear panel, or by activating either of
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
the power door lock switches located on the door trim
panels.
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Once unlocked, the liftgate can be opened or closed. To
open the liftgate, push the LIFTGATE RELEASE switch
located under the right side of the tail panel, which is
located below the liftgate, then pull the liftgate open with
one fluid motion.
Rear Panel Manual Lock Cylinder
To unlock the liftgate with the RKE transmitter, push the
LIFTGATE
button on the RKE transmitter two
times.
Pull Up On The Liftgate
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
NOTE: The liftgate release switch will be ignored under
the following conditions:
• When vehicle speed is not 0 MPH (0 km/h).
WARNING! (Continued)
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
• When all doors are locked (except for RKE transmitter
liftgate access). Refer to “Entering the Liftgate with the
System Armed” under “Vehicle Security Alarm SysGas props support the liftgate in the open position.
tem” for additional information.
However, because the gas pressure drops with temperaThe liftgate ajar icon will illuminate in the Driver Infor- ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
mation Display (DID) when the liftgate is open.
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
(Continued)
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Important Safety Precautions
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
properly.
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing 6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (Refer to ⬙Child Restraints⬙) should 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space Seat Belt Systems
between occupants and the door and occupants could Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
be injured.
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact happen far away from home or on your own street.
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
under ⬙If You Need Assistance.⬙
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Driver And Passenger BeltAlert (If Equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch is first
turned to the START or ON/RUN position, an intermittent chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the
ignition switch is first turned to the START or ON/RUN
position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
remain on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not
active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the
vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range
and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by
blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain
on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the
driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occupants to buckle their seat belts.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
Change Of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,
the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat
belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy
object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts
are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho- vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
(Continued)
(Continued)
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
2
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Positioning The Lap Belt
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfortslack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
The seat belt will automatically retract to its stowed
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Seat Belt Extender
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/ If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
shoulder belt.
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
anchor point.
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate, only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180 degrees to Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occucreate a fold that begins immediately above the latch pant, it must be removed.
plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
WARNING!
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
2
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an
accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child
if they are wearing a seat belt.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen
and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the
shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.
Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under
the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The seat belt in the passenger seating position is
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be (ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
worn snugly and positioned properly.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Restraints” section of this manual. The table below If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
WARNING! (Continued)
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Classification System
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
Advanced Front Air Bags
system components:
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
• Air Bag Warning Light
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
• Steering Wheel and Column
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
• Instrument Panel
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
• Knee Impact Bolsters
the air bag covers.
• Advanced Front Air Bags
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Impact Bolster
Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
Advanced Front Air Bags.
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as Advanced Air Bag Features
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
This vehicle has an Occupant Classification System
which may receive information from the front impact
(“OCS”) in the front passenger seat. The OCS is designed
sensors or other system components.
to activate or deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an Air Bag depending on the occupant’s seated weight. It is
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy designed to deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy Bag for an unoccupied seat and for occupants whose
seated weight classifies them in a category other than a
output is used for more severe collisions.
properly seated adult. This could be a child, teenager, or
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
even an adult.
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon The Passenger Air Bag Disable (“PAD”) Indicator Light
(an amber light located in the center of the instrument
seat position.
panel) tells the driver and front passenger when the
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. The
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
PAD Indicator Light illuminates the words “PASSENGER
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
AIR BAG OFF” to show that the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag will not deploy during a collision.
NOTE: When the front passenger seat is empty or when
very light objects are placed on the seat, the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even though the
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System Indicator Light
is NOT illuminated.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel,
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bags to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
collisions, including some that may produce substantial When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
severe initial deceleration.
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
Occupant Classification System (OCS) - Front
have deployed.
Passenger Seat
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position, The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for
this vehicle. It is designed to activate or deactivate the
away from an inflating air bag.
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag depending on the
occupant’s seated weight. It is designed to deactivate the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag for an unoccupied
seat and for occupants whose seated weight classifies
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
them in a category other than a properly seated adult.
This could be a child, teenager, or even an adult.
WARNING!
• If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated
improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s properly seated weight input. This may
result in serious injury or death in a collision.
• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with
the seatback in an upright position, your back
against the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the center of the seat, with your feet
comfortably on or near the floor.
• Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.
Holding an object may provide an output signal to
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
the OCS that is different than the occupant’s properly seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of
the following:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
• Passenger Air Bag Disabled (PAD) Indicator Light – an
amber light located in the center of the instrument
panel (show icon)
• Air Bag Warning Light
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
• Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfortably on or near the floor.
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is lo- • Sitting with their back against the seat back and the
seat back in an upright position
cated beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM
uses input from the Sensor to determine the front passenger’s most probable classification. The OCM communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC uses the
classification to determine whether it should activate or
deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. In
order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
for the front passenger to be seated properly and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated passengers are:
• Sitting upright
• Facing forward
Seated Properly
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The OCS may deactivate the deployment of the Passen- Passenger Air Bag
ger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates that:
Front Passenger
• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
Seat Occupant
light objects in it.
Status
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
child restraint.
Unoccupied
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a child,
seat *
including a child seated in a forward-facing child
Grocery bags,
restraint or booster seat.
heavy brief• The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pas- cases, and other
senger, including a child or small adult.
relatively light
objects
• The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
Rearward facing
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
infant seat**
Disable (PAD) System
Front Passenger
Advanced Air
Bag Disabled
Indicator Light
(“PAD”) Status
NOT ILLUMINATED
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
Front Passenger
Air Bag Status
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
DEACTIVATED
DEACTIVATED
DEACTIVATED
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Front Passenger
Seat Occupant
Status
Child, including
a child seated in
a forward-facing
child restraint or
booster seat**
Small adult
Properly seated
adult
Front Passenger
Advanced Air
Bag Disabled
Indicator Light
(“PAD”) Status
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
NOT ILLUMINATED
Front Passenger
Air Bag Status
DEACTIVATED
DEACTIVATED
ACTIVATED
* When the front passenger seat is empty or when very
light objects are placed on the seat, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even though the
PAD System Indicator Light is NOT illuminated.
** It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing the deployment of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag. Never allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat and never install a child restraint system,
including a rear-facing child restraint, in this vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
• Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled (PAD)
Indicator Light
The Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag (PAD) Indicator
Light (an amber light located in the center of the instrument panel) tells the driver and front passenger when the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. The
PAD Indicator light illuminates the words “PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF” to show that the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag will not deploy during a collision. When
the front passenger seat is empty or when very light
objects are placed on the seat, the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag will not deploy even though the PAD
indicator light is NOT illuminated.
not seated properly, the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag may deactivate and the PAD Indicator Light will be
illuminated.
The PAD Indicator Light should be illuminated and the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag should be deactivated
for most properly seated and restrained children in the
passenger seat and for most properly installed child
restraint systems. However, under certain conditions,
even with a properly installed child restraint system, the
PAD Indicator Light may not be illuminated, even
though the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated. This can occur if the child restraint is lighter than
the lightest weight necessary to illuminate the PAD
Indicator Light. NEVER assume the Passenger Advanced
The PAD indicator light should not be illuminated when
Front Air Bag is deactivated unless the PAD Indicator
an adult passenger is properly seated in the front passenLight is illuminated with the words “PASSENGER AIR
ger seat. The driver and adult passenger should verify
BAG OFF.”
that the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated when an
adult is riding in the front passenger seat. If an adult is
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
If the PAD Indicator Light is Illuminated for an Adult 5. Restart the vehicle and have the passenger remain in
Passenger:
this seated position for two to three minutes after
restarting the vehicle.
If an adult passenger is seated in the front passenger seat
and the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated, the passenger
WARNING!
may be sitting improperly. Follow the steps below to
allow the OCS to detect the adult passenger’s seated If the PAD Indicator Light remains illuminated for
weight to activate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag: an adult passenger, have an authorized dealer service
1. Turn off the vehicle and have the adult passenger step the air bag system immediately. Failure to do so may
cause serious injury or death. If the PAD Indicator
out of the vehicle.
Light is illuminated with the words “PASSENGER
2. Remove any extra materials from the passenger seat, AIR BAG OFF” the Passenger Advanced Front Air
such as cushions, pads, seat covers, seat massagers,
Bag will not inflate in the event of a collision.
blankets, extra clothing, etc.
3. Place the seatback in the full upright position.
4. Have the adult passenger sit in the center of the seat,
with the passenger’s feet comfortably on or near the
floor, and with their back against the seatback.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
(Continued)
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
• Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult
occupies the passenger seat, the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag may be deactivated. Therefore, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may or may not be activated
for a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult
(depending on size) who is seated in the passenger seat.
This does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
The driver and passenger must always use the PAD
Indicator Light as a determination of whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is activated or deactivated. If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the
words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” when an adult is in
the front passenger seat, have the passenger reposition
his or her body in the seat until the PAD Indicator Light
goes out.
If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the words
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag will not inflate in the event of a collision.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so
may result in serious injury or death. The OCS determines the most probable classification of the occupant
that it detects. The OCS will detect the front passenger’s
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
decreased or increased seated weight, which may result
in deactivation or activation of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not mean that the
OCS is working improperly. Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the front passenger seat may
result in deactivation of the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag causing serious injury or death. Increasing the
front passenger’s seated weight on the front passenger
seat may result in activation of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag. Examples of improper front passenger
seating include:
• The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright
position.
• The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
• Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
• Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
and center console.
• Accessories that may change the seated weight on the
front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger
seat.
• The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instru- • Anything that may decrease or increase the front
ment panel).
passenger’s seated weight.
• The front passenger leans forward, sideways or turns
to face the rear of the vehicle.
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
WARNING! (Continued)
Not Seated Properly
WARNING!
• If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated
improperly, the occupant may provide an output
(Continued)
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s properly seated weight input. This may
result in serious injury or death in a collision.
• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with
the seatback in an upright position, your back
against the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in the center of the seat, with your feet
comfortably on or near the floor.
• Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.
Holding an object may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different than the occupant’s properly seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Air Bag Warning Light
will illuminate whenever
the OCS is unable to classify the front passenger seat
status. A malfunction in the OCS may affect the
operation of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light
does not come on, or
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as
you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
Placing an object on the floor under the front passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or death
in a collision. Do not place any objects on the floor
under the front passenger seat.
If there is a fault present in the OCS, both the PAD
Indicator Light and the Air Bag Warning Light will
illuminate to show that the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag is deactivated. Should this occur, the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will remain deactivated until the fault is cleared. This indicates that
you should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer
for service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS components that may affect Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly classify the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
seated weight of a front seat passenger, the OCS compo- • At no time should any supplemental restraint system
nents must function as designed. Do not make any
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener
modifications to the front passenger seat components,
be modified or replaced with any part except those
assembly, or to the seat cover. If the seat, trim cover, or
which are approved by FCA US LLC.
cushion needs service for any reason, take the vehicle to
your authorized dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat
WARNING!
accessories may be used.
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
the passenger seat assembly, its related components,
• Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the
air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This
components in any way.
could result in death or serious injury to the front
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
cushions not designated by FCA US LLC for the modified vehicle may not comply with required
specific model being repaired. Always use the correct Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).
• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
• Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure. The SABICs are located in
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
the door trim below the side windows. The trim covering
driver and front passenger, and position the front occuthe SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
Knee Impact Bolsters
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Door-Integrated Side Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental DoorIntegrated Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
injuries to front seat occupants in certain side impacts, in
Supplemental Door-Integrated Side Air Bag Label
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or SABIC occupant protection. In side impacts, the SABICs
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left
side SABIC only and a right-side impact deploys the
windows in certain side impact events.
right side SABIC only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a
The SABICs deploy upward, covering the side windows.
good indicator of whether or not SABICs should have
An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the trim
deployed.
out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are SABICs will not deploy in all side collisions, including
not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an that do not impact the area of the passenger compartment. SABICs may deploy during angled or offset frontal
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
collisions where the Advanced Front Air Bags deploy.
SABICs are designed to activate in certain side impacts.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) determines SABICs are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system.
whether the deployment of the SABIC in a particular SABICs deploy in less time than it takes to blink your
impact event is appropriate, based on the severity and eyes. Occupants, including children, who are up against
type of collision. The side impact sensors aid the ORC in or very close to SABICs can be seriously injured or killed.
determining the appropriate response to impact events. Occupants, including children, should never lean on or
The system is calibrated to deploy the SABIC on the
impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
sleep against the door, side windows, or area where the
side air bags inflate, even if they are in an infant or child
restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
help keep you in position, away from an inflating SABIC.
To get the best protection from the SABICs, occupants
must wear their seat belts properly and sit upright with
their backs against the seats. Children must be properly
restrained in a child restraint or booster seat that is
appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Door-Integrated Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs). Do not stack luggage or
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
other cargo up high enough to block the deployment of the SABICs. The door trim below the side
windows where the SABIC and its deployment
path are located, should remain free from any
obstructions.
• SABICs need room to inflate. Do not lean against
the door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
• Being too close to the SABICs during deployment
could cause you to be severely injured or killed.
• Relying on the SABICs alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The SABICs work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, SABICs won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even though you have
SABICs.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious to you, but
they will open during air bag deployment.
If A Deployment Occurs
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate • As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
immediately after deployment.
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
the air bag system.
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
or all of the following may occur:
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
structions for cleaning.
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric- Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have detion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard
lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light
button.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power.
• Unlock the power door locks.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
authorized dealer immediately.
Procedure
Enhanced Accident Response System
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
engine compartment and on the ground near the engine may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
and starting the engine.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
Air Bag Warning Light
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Control- the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a maller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with air bag function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
system electrical components.
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of again after initial startup.
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfuncthe OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag
tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in
the on position, and stays on after you start the
vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine Maintaining Your Air Bag System
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
WARNING!
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
system immediately.
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
(Continued)
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
were buckled/fastened;
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
vehicle or the EDR.
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
Child Restraints
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
These data can help provide a better understanding of times, including babies and children.
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a province, requires that small children ride in proper
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosthe EDR under normal driving conditions and no per- ecuted for ignoring it.
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en- Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1-866-732-8243.
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafetychildren from newborn size to the child almost large
index-53.htm
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the child
restraint.
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and
Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight limit
of their booster seat
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking
Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for additional information on ALR.
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Can the head restraints be
removed?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Installing A Child Restraint with A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
No
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR retractor.
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
“click.”
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
against the child seat.
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
attach a tether anchor.
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
in any direction.
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
There is a tether strap anchor located behind
the child tether access cover behind the passenger seat. To attach a child restraint tether strap
to the anchor:
1. Move the seat forward.
2. Move the seatback to its full forward position.
3. Remove the child tether access cover by prying either
side with a screwdriver or similar tool, as shown.
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Seat Tether Access Cover
Child Seat Tether Anchor
NOTE: While the child tether is in use, keep the access
cover in a safe place so that it can be replaced after use of
the child tether.
4. Pass the child restraint tether hook through either
opening in the seatback underneath the head restraint.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
5. Attach the tether hook to the anchor loop.
8. Remove slack from the tether strap according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s directions.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
6. Move the seat to its farthest rearward position. Apply injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
body pressure to the seat to be sure the seat adjusters a collision.
have latched.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
7. Return the seatback to an upright position.
Tether Hook
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not more
than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration.
The following tips will be helpful in obtaining optimum
performance and maximum durability for your new SRT • Avoid aggressive braking.
Vehicle.
• Drive with the engine speed less than 3,500 RPM.
Despite modern technology and World Class manufacturing methods, the moving parts of the vehicle must still • Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph (88 km/h) and
observe local speed limits.
wear in with each other. This wearing in occurs mainly
during the first 500 miles (805 km) and continues through 100 to 300 miles (161 to 483 km):
the first oil change interval.
• Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not more
It is recommended for the operator to observe the followthan halfway to avoid rapid acceleration in lower
ing driving behaviors during the new vehicle break-in
gears (1st to 3rd gears).
period:
• Avoid aggressive braking.
0 to 100 miles (0 to 161 km):
• Drive with the engine speed less than 5,000 RPM.
• Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for an
• Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph (112 km/h) and
extended period of time.
observe local speed limits.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):
SAFETY TIPS
• Exercise the full engine rpm range, shifting manually Transporting Passengers
(paddles or gear shift) at higher rpms when possible. NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
• Do not perform sustained operation with the accelera- AREA.
tor pedal at wide open throttle.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph (136 km/h) and
observe local speed limits.
For the first 1500 mi (2414 km):
• Do not participate in track events, sport driving
schools, or similar activities during the first 1500 mi
(2414 km).
NOTE: Check engine oil with every refueling and add if
necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may be higher
through the first oil change interval. Running the engine
with an oil level below the add mark can cause severe
engine damage
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
(Continued)
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
(Continued)
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition, to ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an authofor lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
rized dealer.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Defroster
Vehicle
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperimmediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
able.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
Floor Mat Safety Information
collision. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, Always use floor mats designed to fit the foot well of
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt your vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal
area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the
Air Bag Warning Light
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight ways.
seconds for a bulb check when the ignition is first cycled
Seat Belts
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Door Latches
Tires
Fluid Leaks
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires for proper pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92 䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
▫ Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Manual Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
▫ Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
▫ Non-Adjustable Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . .103
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .104
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
▫ Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
3
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . .119
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .112
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
▫ Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 䡵 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .125
䡵 TILT STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . .126
䡵 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
▫ Adjustable Foot Rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .129
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .130 䡵 CUPHOLDERS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . .138
▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .134 䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ Auxiliary Jumper Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
3
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. This feature will be defaulted
on, and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in
reverse.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
If Equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
a 9-1-1 button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
Assist Calls
The ASSIST Button is used for contacting Roadside
Assistance, Vehicle Care and Uconnect Care. The 9-1-1
Button connects you to emergency services to someone
who can help. Roadside Assistance will know what
vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional fees
may apply for roadside Assistance.
• Uconnect Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
for Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access Via Mobile
features.
• The 9–1–1 and ASSIST buttons will only function if
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or
vehicle issues.
3G(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only
be operable if your Uconnect Access service is active
and you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data)
or 3G(data) network.
3
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
9-1-1 Call
NOTE:
Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized
by the subscriber.
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call • Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s 9-1-1
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator
9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the
may be able to open a voice connection with the
Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the
vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once
touch screen.
the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection with the
vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator should be able
WARNING!
to speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear
sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s 9-1-1
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
Call system will attempt to remain connected with the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
9-1-1 operator until the 9-1-1 operator terminates the
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
connection.
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G(data) network and
GPS antennas. You could prevent operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal
reception, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/
data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function
properly.
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,
AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
(Continued)
3
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side mirror.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select butThe power mirror controls are located on the driver-side tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right) to select the
door trim panel.
mirror that you want to adjust.
Power Mirrors
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Power Mirror Controls
3
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Vanity Mirror
SEATS
A vanity mirror is on the passenger side sun visor. To use Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the vehicle.
mirror cover upward.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Vanity Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
Manual Seats
Forward And Rearward Adjustment
Seat Adjustment Bar
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seat, near the floor.
Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once the seat is in the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
3
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Height Adjustment
Recliner Adjustment
Height Adjustment Lever
Recline Lever
The seat height adjustment lever is located on the outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on the lever to raise
the seat height or push downward on the lever to lower
the seat height.
The recliner lever is located on the outboard side of the
seat. To recline the seat, lean forward slightly, pull the
recliner lever upward, lean backward until the seat is in
the desired position, and release the lever. To return the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
seat to its full upright position, lean forward, pull the Power Seats
recliner lever upward and hold it until the seat returns to On models equipped with power seats, the power seat
its full upright position.
switch is located on the outboard side of the seat near the
floor.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
Power Seat Switch
3
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward
The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward.
Push the power seat recliner switch forward or rearward,
the seatback will move in the direction of the switch.
Release the switch when the desired position has been
reached.
Power Seat Recliner Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Non-Adjustable Head Restraints
The non-adjustable head restraints are form fitted into
the upper structure of the seatback and are designed to
reduce the risk of injury by restricting head movement in
the event of a rear impact. The seatback should be
properly adjusted to an upright position where the head
restraint is positioned as close as possible to the back of
your head.
3
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is locked securely into
position. Otherwise, the seat will not provide the
proper stability for passengers. An improperly
latched seatback could cause serious injury.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
1. Reach into the back side area of the drivers front
fender to gain access to the hood release lever.
Hood Release Lever Location
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
2. Pull the hood release lever rearward to release the
hood latches.
3
Opened Hood
Hood Release Lever
3. Lift the hood upward to the full forward position.
NOTE: The recommended lift point is to place the lifting
hand forward of one of the wiper arms and pull up. The
assist props will help raise and hold the hood to a normal
usage position.
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Do not leave the hood open in areas where strong
gust of wind are likely. Such a place might be by
the side of the road where large trucks pass by.
Strong gusts of wind may damage the hood. Always close the hood in such situations.
• To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood
to close it. Simply lower the hood until it is open
approximately 18 in (46 cm) and then drop it. This
should secure both latches. If both latches did not
secure, a slight push effort in the same area used
for opening the hood (front of wiper arm) needs to
be applied to secure the latches. Never drive the
vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both
latches engaged.
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming and
interior lights.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
Automatic Headlights
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the A
(AUTO) position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after placing the ignition
in the OFF position. To turn the Automatic system off,
move the headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature
3
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the
delay.
this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Headlight Time Delay
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
• The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
feature.
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
• The headlight delay time is programmable using the
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
Uconnect System, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Unvehicle in an unlit area.
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inforTo activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
mation.
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
Daytime Running Lights
Multifunction Lever
The LED Daytime Running Lights will come on whenever the engine is running and the park brake is off. The
headlight switch must be used for normal nighttime
driving.
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
be turned on and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Multifunction Lever
3
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Signals
High/Low Beam Switch
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
NOTE:
Flash-To-Pass
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the Driver
Information Display (DID) and a continuous chime
will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile
(1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light and the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
switch.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
located on the left side of the instrument panel. Rotating
the dimmer control upward with the parking lights or
headlights on will increase the brightness of the instrument panel lights and ambient lighting.
3
Dimmer Control
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Light Control
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior position. The interior lights will remain off when the
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this doors are open.
position.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, Driver Information Display (DID),
and radio when the position lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers
and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
Interior Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
(Continued)
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” position before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Mist Feature
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to
the first detent and release. The wipers will cycle one
time and automatically shut off.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob,
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to
the second detent. Washer fluid will be sprayed and the
wiper will operate for two to three cycles after the washer
knob is released from this position.
When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from If the washer knob is depressed while in the delay range,
a passing vehicle is needed, push the washer knob, the wiper will operate for several seconds after the
washer knob is released. It will then resume the intermittent interval previously selected. If the washer knob is
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
pushed while in the off position, the wiper will turn on Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
and cycle approximately three times after the wash knob Automatic Headlights Only)
is released.
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off
rating information can be found on most washer fluid when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by
this feature.
containers.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Features”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
TILT STEERING COLUMN
The tilt release lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the left side of the steering column. To tilt the
column, simply pull the release lever rearward toward
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
you and then move the steering wheel upward or downward as desired. When the column is in the desired
position, push the release lever forward to lock the
column firmly in place.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator,
and clutch pedal to move toward or away from the driver
to provide improved position with the steering wheel.
Tilt Steering Column Lever
The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left side of
the steering column.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
NOTE:
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full
pedal travel.
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find
the best possible seat/pedal position.
CAUTION!
Adjustable Pedals Switch
Push the switch forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle).
Push the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
Adjustable Foot Rest
This feature allows the driver to adjust the foot rest
forward or backward and to rotate it upward or downward to allow for greater driving comfort.
Adjustable Foot Rest
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
To adjust the pedal:
1. Adjust the seat and steering column to a comfortable
position.
2. Using a socket wrench, loosen the nut on the pedal.
3
3. Slide the pedal either forward or backward and rotate
it upward or downward as desired.
4. Tighten the nut, being careful not to over tighten it.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
1 — ON/OFF
2 — RES +
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
4 — CANCEL
3 — SET -
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple speed control buttons are pushed at the
same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Activate
To Set A Desired Speed
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the Electronic Speed
Control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the Driver Information Display (DID) will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
To Deactivate
To Vary The Speed Setting
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, manually accelerating 10 mph (16 km/h) above
the set speed or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory.
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “UnderPushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
switch OFF erases the set speed memory.
The speed increment shown is dependent on the selected
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+) U.S. Speed (mph)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Metric Speed (km/h)
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the RES (+) button once will result in a • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de- • Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under- • If the button is continually pushed, the set speed will
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the selected
the new set speed will be established.
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
NOTE: The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected
Push the accelerator as you would normally. When the
through the Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Setpedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
NOTE: If the accelerated speed goes above 10 mph further information.
(16 km/h) of the set speed, the Electronic Speed Control
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay
will deactivate.
feature and it is turned ON, the rear camera image will be
displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exEQUIPPED
ceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear ⬙PARK⬙ or the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
position.
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever/gear selector is put into REVERSE. The When the Vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with
ParkView camera is located on the rear of the vehicle camera delay turned OFF) the rear camera mode is exited
above the rear license plate. The image will be displayed and the last touchscreen appears again.
in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to
The active guide lines are overlaid on the image to
“check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. illustrate the width of the vehicle and its projected
After five seconds this note will disappear.
backup path based on the steering wheel position.
To Accelerate For Passing
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be
used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
The HomeLink buttons, located on the sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink channels. The
HomeLink indicator is located above the center button.
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink
system.
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds, or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not
NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
Alarm is active.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
Ensure your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
before you begin programming.
HomeLink Buttons Sunvisor
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
3
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
in view.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
program while you push and hold the hand-held step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
transmitter button.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indiseconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
cator light. The HomeLink indicator will flash slowly
activates, programming is complete.
and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. ReNOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not actilease both buttons after the indicator light changes
vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
from slow to rapid.
complete the training.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is channels.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink button you would like
to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
light in view.
follow these steps:
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
program while you push and hold the hand-held
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the
transmitter button.
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indirelease the button.
cator light. HomeLink indicator will flash slowly and
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programthen rapidly after HomeLink has received the freming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
quency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
steps.
both buttons after the indicator light changes from
slow to rapid.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button
and observe the indicator light.
before 1995.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
(Rolling Code)
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink button is pressed.
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
erase the channels.
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button (Non
— Rolling Code)
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink
follow these steps:
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the time-out in the same manner.
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
release the button.
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- door or gate motor.
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
remaining steps.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 NOTE:
cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programprogram while keeping the HomeLink indicator light
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
in view.
activate when the HomeLink button is pushed.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink button,
• To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons,
while you press and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has
erase the channels.
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take (Canadian/Gate Operator)
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
door may open and close while you are programming. follow these steps:
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
and observe the indicator light.
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
release the button.
erased.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink
Troubleshooting Tips
To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink
button. Activation will now occur for the programmed
device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at
any time.
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here
are some of the most common solutions:
Security
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener handheld transmitter.
• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
If you have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety
information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with two 12 Volt (13 Amp)
power outlet that can be used to power cellular phones,
small electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
One power outlet is located on the center console to the
right of the shifter. Push down on the power outlet to
access the opening. Push down on it again to close. This
power outlet is powered when the ignition is in the ON
or ACC position.
Front Power Outlet
The second power outlet is located between the seat
backs above the cup holders. This power outlet is connected directly by the battery and powered at all times.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Center Console Outlet
NOTE: Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
need to be replaced.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
(Continued)
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
NOTE: The electronic device must draw less than five
amps to prevent damage.
To install, remove the mirror cover by pulling straight
down and separating the cover pieces.
Auxiliary Jumper Harness
The Viper is equipped with an auxiliary power jumper,
allowing an electronic device to be directly connected to
the vehicle without having to use the console power
outlets. Power to the device will be controlled by the
ignition switch.
Mirror Cover Removal
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Connect the auxiliary port jumper into the unused con- Re-install the mirror cover and be sure to not pinch the
nector taped to the wiring bundle. Connect the other end wires that go into the electronic device.
of the auxiliary port jumper to the electronic device.
NOTE: The red wire in the bundle is the power wire and
will provide the positive 12 volts to the electronic device.
3
Mirror Cover Installation
Auxiliary Port Jumper
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS — IF EQUIPPED
STORAGE
There are two cupholders located in the rear of the center Glove Compartment
console.
An electronic glove compartment is located on the passenger side of the instrument panel. Push in the button to
open the glove compartment.
Center Console Cupholders
Glove Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Console Features
Console Cubby Bin — If Equipped
An open storage area, or cubby bin, is located in the
center console rearward of the shift lever.
Opened Glove Compartment
NOTE: The glove compartment will lock with the door
locks unless the key fob is detected inside the vehicle.
Center Console Cubby Bin Location
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cargo Net Storage — If Equipped
Storage Bin — If Equipped
There is a cargo net storage area located between the There is a storage bin located between the driver and
driver and passengers seat.
passengers seat. Pull up on the release lever to open the
storage bin.
Cargo Net Storage Location
Storage Bin Location
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
3
Door Storage
The door panels contain storage areas located in the
lower center area of the door panel.
Door Panel Storage
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control panel. Push this button to turn
on the rear window defroster. An indicator in the button
will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, push the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .146
▫ Driver Information Display (DID) Messages . . .176
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
▫ DID Selectable Menu Items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
䡵 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS . . . . . . .149 䡵 CYBERSECURITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150 䡵 UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .160
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .168
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
▫ White Telltale Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Customer Programmable Features/Personal
Settings — Uconnect 8.4 System Settings . . . . .190
▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
䡵 DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) . . . . .172
▫ DID Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ SRT Performance Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
䡵 UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .208
4
144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 iPod/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .208
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . .209
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
䡵 RADIO ANTENNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES . .210
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC). . . . . . .211
▫ Summer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
▫ Winter Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
▫ Vacation/Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
▫ Window Fogging and Frosting . . . . . . . . . . . .217
▫ Outside Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
▫ Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather
Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
䡵 PERSONALIZED MENU BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
䡵 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
▫ Introducing Uconnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
▫ Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
▫ Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
▫ Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
▫ Climate (8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
▫ Navigation (8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
▫ Uconnect Access (8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
▫ Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
▫ Register (8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
▫ Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
▫ Mobile App (8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
▫ Voice Texting (8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
▫ Yelp (8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
4
146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Outlet
— Sound System Speaker
— Instrument Cluster
— Keyless Enter-N-Go Start/Stop Button
— Glove Compartment Lock
6 — Passenger Air Bag
7 — Glove Compartment
8 — Uconnect System
9 — Uconnect System Hard Controls
10 — Switch Bank (Screen Off, Hazard
Switch, Back Button)
11 — Climate Controls
12 — Dimmer Controls
13 — Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
Instrument Cluster
148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Speedometer
• Indicates vehicle speed
2. Tachometer
• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
3. Temperature Gauge
• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating
satisfactorily.
• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather or up mountain grades. It should not be allowed to exceed the
upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
All active telltales will display first if applicable. The
4. Fuel Gauge
• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank system check menu may appear different based upon
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position equipment options and current vehicle status. Some
telltales are optional and may not appear.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator light switches on
in the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These
indications are indicative and precautionary and as such
must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative
to the information contained in the Owner Manual,
which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.
Always refer to the information in this chapter in the
event of a failure indication.
4
150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Red Telltale Indicator Lights
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a
chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will
sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
Air Bag Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is
first turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on
while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This
light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer
to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
4
152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Brake Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
United States
Canada
What It Means
Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may
be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac- indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is dropped below a specified level.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi- Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
the brake fluid level checked.
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necesunless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
sary.
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
4
154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Red Warning
Light
What It Means
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and
the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after
reaching a set threshold. Further overheating will cause a continuous chime sound for
4 minutes, or until the engine is allowed to cool, whichever comes first.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
Red Warning
Light
What It Means
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is
on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Charging System Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Charging System Warning Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes
on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s nonessential electrical devices or increase
engine speed (if at idle). If the charging system light remains on, it means that the vehicle is
experiencing a problem with the charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an
authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies.”
4
156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light
turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and
you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/
RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
4
158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped
This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Power Steering System).
Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. If the light turns on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
Door Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
Trunk Open Warning Light
Red Telltale
Light
What It Means
Trunk Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the trunk is open and not fully closed.
4
160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The
light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not
require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
4
162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch
is turned to the ON/RUN position. It should go out with the engine running. If the “ESC
Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h),
see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was
turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused
the ESC activation.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
4
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disengage the light. If the light does not turn off, please see your authorized dealer.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light
The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for low tire pressure telltale.
those tires.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.
4
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
Low Fuel Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Low Fuel Indicator Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.5 gal (5.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain
on until fuel is added.
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light
After the ignition is turned on, the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) light illuminates to indicate function check at vehicle startup. If the light remains on after startup or comes on and
stays on at road speeds, it may indicate that the ABS has detected a malfunction or has become inoperative. The system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes.
4
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Yellow Telltale
Light
What It Means
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light are on, see an authorized dealer
immediately. Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light
This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT
turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected
when the multifunction lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with
either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
4
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light
Green Telltale
Light
What It Means
Cruise Control Engaged Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the cruise control has been engaged.
White Telltale Indicator Light
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
White Telltale
Light
What It Means
Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
Blue Telltale Indicator Light
High Beam Indicator Light
Blue Telltale
Light
What It Means
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control
lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to
switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, ⬙flash to pass⬙ scenario.
4
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful
information by pushing the switches mounted on the
steering wheel. The DID consists of the following:
• Tachometer
• MPH/KMH
• Vehicle Information
• Fuel Economy
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Audio
Driver Information Display (DID)
• Stored Messages
The Driver Information Display (DID) features a driver- • Screen Setup
interactive display that is located in the instrument
• Performance
cluster.
• Diagnostics
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
• Hibernation
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
• UP Arrow Button
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu and submenus (Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Audio,
Stored Messages, Screen Set Up).
• DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
submenus (Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Audio,
Stored Messages, Screen Set Up).
DID Steering Wheels Controls
4
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• RIGHT Arrow Button
DID Display
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access/select the information screens or submenu screens of a main menu item. Push and
hold the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds
to reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.
• LEFT Arrow Button
Push and release the LEFT arrow button to
return to the main menu from an info screen or
submenu item.
NOTE: Pushing any arrow will override the DID “pop
up” messages and return you to the menu screen.
DID Display
The DID display is located in the center portion of the
instrument cluster and consists of the following sections:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
1. Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will 7. ESC Status — The ESC status icon will illuminate in
illuminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for
this area. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
non critical warnings, red for critical warnings, and
white for on demand information.
8. Launch Control status when launch control mode is
2. Audio / Phone Information and Sub-menu Informaentered. Refer to “Launch Mode” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
tion — Whenever there are sub-menus available, the
position within the sub-menus is shown here.
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
4. Telltales/Indicators
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn5. Selectable Information (Tach, Mph/Kmh, Vehicle Info, ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Audio, Stored Messages, into several categories:
Screen Setup, Performance, Diagnostics, Hibernation) • Five Second Stored Messages
3. Reconfigurable Telltales/Information
6. Suspension Status — The suspension status icon will When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
illuminate in this area. Refer to “Starting And Operat- message takes control of the main display area for five
ing” for further information.
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
4
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item. As long
as there is a stored message, an “i” will be displayed in
the DID’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this
message type are “Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out”
and “Low Tire Pressure.”
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An
example of this message type is “Automatic High Beams
On.”
Driver Information Display (DID) Messages
•
NOTE: Pushing the LEFT arrow button will override the
DID “pop up” messages and return you to the menu •
screen.
•
• Unstored Messages
•
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
•
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal •
is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).
• Five Second Unstored Messages
Front Seat Belts Unbuckled
Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled
Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled
Key Fob Battery Low
Service Air Bag System
ESC Status (ESC OFF, ESC ON, ESC SPORT, ESC
TRACK, RAIN MODE) — Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control System” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five • Oil Pressure Low
• Fuel Low
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
• Service Antilock Brake System
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Service Electronic Throttle Control
• Lights On
• Cruise Off
• Right Turn Signal Light Out
• Cruise Ready
• Left Turn Signal Light Out
• Cruise Set To XXX MPH
• Turn Signal On
• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire Pressure Warnings • Service Air Bag System
• Service Tire Pressure System
• Service Air Bag Warning Light
• Parking Brake Engaged
• Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled
• Brake Fluid Low
• Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled
• Service Electronic Braking System
• Front Seat Belts Unbuckled
• Engine Temperature Hot
• Door Open
• Battery Voltage Low
• Doors Open
• Brake Wear
• Park Brake Engaged
4
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
DID Selectable Menu Items
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until
the desired Selectable Menu icon is highlighted in the
DID.
Tachometer
MPH To km/h
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the MPH to km/h icon is highlighted in the DID. Push and release the OK
button to change the display between MPH
or km/h.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Tachometer icon is highlighted Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
in the DID. Push and release the RIGHT arrow
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button to change the display between full
button until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted
tachometer or tachometer with digital speedometer.
in the DID. Push and release the RIGHT arrow
button to display the following information
submenus:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be
reset. Push and release the LEFT arrow button to return
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
to the main menu.
“Tire Pressure” is highlighted in the DID. Push and
release the RIGHT arrow button, and one of the follow- Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
ing will be displayed:
under “Starting and Operating” for further information.
Tire Pressure
• If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle ICON is Coolant Temperature
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the ICON.
“Coolant Temperature” is highlighted in the DID. Push
• If one or more tires have low pressure, the tire pressure and release the RIGHT arrow button, and the coolant
values in each corner of the ICON with the pressure temperature will be displayed.
value of the low tire displayed in a different color than
Oil Temperature
the other tire pressure value.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
• If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service
“Oil Temperature” is highlighted in the DID. Push and
Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
release the RIGHT arrow button, and the oil temperature
will be displayed.
4
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Hours
Current Power
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Engine Hours” is highlighted in the DID. Push and
release the RIGHT arrow button, and the engine hours
will be displayed.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Current Power” is highlighted in the DID. Push and
release the RIGHT arrow button, and the current power
will be displayed.
Intake Air Temp.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
“Intake Air Temp.” is highlighted in the DID. Push and
release the RIGHT arrow button, and the intake air
temperature will be displayed.
Current Torque
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Fuel Economy icon is highlighted and the following will display:
Range To Empty (RTE)
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until Average Fuel Economy/Miles Per Gallon (MPG Bar“Current Torque” is highlighted in the DID. Push and graph)
release the RIGHT arrow button, and the current torque Current Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
will be displayed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
Trip A
Trip B — If Equipped
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Trip A icon is highlighted in
the DID. The Trip A information will display
the following:
Push and release UP or DOWN arrow button
until the Trip B icon is highlighted in the DID.
The Trip B information will display the
following:
• Distance
• Distance
• Average Speed
• Average Speed
• Elapsed Time
• Elapsed Time
Hold the RIGHT arrow button to reset all the informa- Hold the RIGHT arrow button to reset all the information.
tion.
4
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Audio
source.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Upper Left
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
• None
button until the Audio display icon is highlighted in the DID. Push and release the • Compass
RIGHT arrow button to display the active
• Temperature
Stored Messages
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Messages Menu item is highlighted in the DID. This feature shows the
number of stored warning messages. Pushing
the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see what the
stored messages are.
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Average Fuel
• Current Fuel
• Trip A
• Trip B
• Elapsed Time
When no messages are present, main menu icon will be a • Oil Pressure
closed envelope.
• Oil Temperature
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
• Battery
• Oil Temperature
• Coolant Temperature
• Battery
Upper Right
• Coolant Temperature
• None
• RIGHT Arrow Button
• Compass
Restore To Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default
Settings)
• Temperature
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
confirm.
• Range To Empty (RTE)
• Average Fuel
• Current Fuel
Digital Speed
• Trip A
• On
• Trip B
• Elapsed Time
• Oil Pressure
• Off
4
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tach. Peak Hold
When enabled, the Tach. Peak Hold function marks the
peak Revolutions Per Minute (RPM) on the tachometer
gauge for 3 seconds when the RPM is above 4000. Using
the UP and DOWN arrow switches on the left side of the
steering wheel, select the gauges icon from the menu on
the left side of the cluster (highlighted red is the active
menu item). Use the RIGHT arrow to enter the gauges
setup screen and the UP/DOWN arrows to select Tach
Peak from the menu of gauge options.
Tach. Peak Hold
Select up and down to toggle between “ON” and “OFF.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the SRT icon is highlighted in the DID. Push and release
the RIGHT arrow button, and 0–60 MPH Duration will
be displayed. Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT
arrow button to scroll through the following information
sub-menus:
SRT Performance
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Performance Features is intended for off-highway or offroad use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
0–60 Time
Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT arrow button
until the last 0–60 MPH information is displayed.
Braking Distance
Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT arrow button
until the last Braking Distance information is displayed.
1/4 Mile Elapsed Time
Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT arrow button
until the last 1/4 Mile Top Speed & Duration information
is displayed.
4
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1/8 Mile Elapsed Time
RIGHT arrow button to display any present diagnostic
trouble codes along with a brief definition.
Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT arrow button
until the last 1/8 Mile Top Speed & Duration information Vehicle Hibernation
is displayed.
G-Force Instant
To Activate Hibernation Mode
Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT arrow button
until the Current G-Forces are displayed.
1. Cycle the ignition switch to (ACC).
G-Force Peak
2. Select Hibernation mode within the Driver Information Display (DID).
Push and release the LEFT and RIGHT arrow button
3. Push the RIGHT arrow button on the steering wheel
until the Peak G-Forces are displayed.
controls for one second. Vehicle will countdown from
Diagnostic Codes
ten seconds and enter Hibernation Mode.
NOTE: You may push the RIGHT arrow button on the
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
steering wheel controls during the countdown to abort
button until the Diagnostic Code icon is highHibernation Mode.
lighted in the DID. Push and release the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
software updates to improve the usability and performance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of
1. Push the RKE UNLOCK button to unlock the vehicle.
unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle sys2. Push the Keyless Push Button Ignition to the ON/ tems.
RUN position.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems may still exist, even if the most recent
CYBERSECURITY
version of vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be installed.
equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These
networks allow your vehicle to send and receive inforWARNING!
mation. This information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful
including safety related systems, could be imaccess to vehicle systems and wireless communications.
paired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that
Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over
may result in an accident involving serious injury
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
or death.
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar
to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require
To Deactivate Hibernation Mode
(Continued)
4
188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING! (Continued)
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media
of unknown origin could possibly contain malicious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it
may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to
be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized
dealer immediately.
• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/softwareupdate to learn about available Uconnect software
updates.
• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.
personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept
information and private communications without your
consent. For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices” in “All About Uconnect Access” in your Owner’s
Manual Radio Supplement and “Onboard Diagnostic
NOTE:
System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Maintaining Your
• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding Vehicle” in your Owner’s Manual on the DVD.
software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize
the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
should:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel that allow you to
access and change the customer programmable features.
4
NOTE: Features can vary by vehicle, depending on
vehicle configuration.
Uconnect 8.4AN Buttons On The Touchscreen And
Buttons On The Faceplate
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
allows you to access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect
Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Engine Off Options,
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Setthere is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
tings, Clear Personal Data, and System Information.
side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instrument panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.
menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the
To adjust the setting of a programmable feature, press the
center of the control knob one or more times to select or
desired setting option. Once in the desired setting option,
change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
press and release the preferred setting until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
Buttons On The Touchscreen
been selected.
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Once the setting is complete, press the Back Arrow
Uconnect display.
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu
Customer Programmable Features/Personal
or press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of
Settings — Uconnect 8.4 System Settings
the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow
Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen, then press button on the right side of the screen will allow you to
the “Settings” button on the touchscreen to display the toggle up or down through the list of available settings.
menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect system
Buttons On The Faceplate
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
NOTE: The usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause
the radio to activate the “Display Brightness With HeadAfter pressing the Display button on the touchscreen the
lights OFF” control even though the headlights are on.
following settings will be available.
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
• Display Mode
Display
This feature will allow you to select one of the auto
display settings. To change Mode status, press and release the Auto or Manual button on the touchscreen.
Then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen, or
push the back button on the faceplate.
This feature will allow you to select the display brightness when the headlights are off. Adjust the brightness
with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen,
then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen, or
push the back button on the faceplate.
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
• Set Theme — If Equipped
This feature will allow you to select the display brightness when the headlights are on. Adjust the brightness
with the “+” and “–” setting buttons on the touchscreen,
then press the arrow back button on the touchscreen, or
push the back button on the faceplate.
This feature will allow you to choose a theme for the
display screen. The theme will change the background
color, highlight color, and button color of the display
screen.
• Set Language
This feature will allow you to select one of the languages
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions
4
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Set
Language button on the touchscreen and then press the
desired language button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the language, showing that
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push
the back button on the faceplate.
the Touchscreen Beep button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push
the back button on the faceplate.
• Units
This feature will allow you to have the DID, odometer,
and navigation system (if equipped) changed between
US and Metric units of measure. Press US or Metric until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push
the back button on the faceplate.
When this feature is selected, the Controls Screen will
stay open for five seconds before the screen times out.
With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open
until it is manually closed. Press the Control Screen
Time-Out button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu, or push the back button
on the faceplate.
• Touchscreen Beep
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
• Control Screen Time-Out — If Equipped
This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
sound heard when a touchscreen button is pressed. Press will appear in the DID as the vehicle approaches a
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193
designated turn within a programmed route. To turn on
or enable, press the Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu or push the back button on
the faceplate.
Voice
• Show Command List
When in this display, you may choose to Always, With
Help, or Never display the Teleprompter with possible
options while in a voice session. To change the Show
Command List settings, press the “Always,” “With
Help,” or “Never” button on the touchscreen until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected.
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the Clock
following settings will be available:
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the
• Voice Response Length
following settings will be available:
When in this display, you may change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, press the “Brief” or “Detailed” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected.
• Sync Time With GPS
This feature will allow you to automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press
the “Sync with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow
4
194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous • Time Format
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
This feature will allow you to select the time format
• Set Time Hours
display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the 12hrs
This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync
or 24hrs setting, showing that setting has been selected.
with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must be
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
to the previous menu, or push the back button on the
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or
faceplate.
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu or press the” X” button on Safety & Driving Assistance — If Equipped
the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on
• Set Time Minutes
the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The
“Sync with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu or press the “X” button on
the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.
• ParkView Backup Camera Delay
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
the previous screen appears again. When the vehicle is
shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned ON),
the rear view image with dynamic grid lines will be
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195
displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
“PARK” or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
To set the ParkView Backup Camera Delay press the
“settings” button, then the “Safety & Driving Assistance”
button on the touchscreen. Press the “Parkview Backup
camera Delay” button on the touchscreen to turn the
ParkView Delay ON or OFF.
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status, press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval. Press the back
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
system is active. To make your selection, press the “Hill
Start Assist” button on the touchscreen until a check- • Headlight Illumination On Approach
mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
has been selected. Press the back arrow/Done button on and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select
4
196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
your desired time interval. Press the back arrow button the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
push the back button on the faceplate.
previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
• Headlights With Wipers
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap- When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
your selection, press the Headlights With Wipers button selected. To make your selection, press the Flash Lights
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to with Lock button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
previous menu, or push the back button on the faceplate. to return to the previous menu, or push the back button
on the faceplate.
• Daytime Running Lights
Doors & Locks
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the vehicle is set in motion. To make your After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchselection, press the Daytime Running Lights button on screen the following settings will be available.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197
• Auto Door Locks
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu, or push the back button on the
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock autofaceplate.
matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto Door • Flash Lights With Lock
Locks” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the Passive Entry
to return to the previous menu, or push the back button Feature. To make your selection, press the Flash Lights
on the faceplate.
With Lock button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
• Auto Unlock On Exit
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
to return to the previous menu, or push the back button
the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
on the faceplate.
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press the Auto Unlock On Exit • Sound Horn With Lock
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. the Key Fob Lock button is pressed. To make your
selection, push the Sound Horn With Remote Lock
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
4
198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the
driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press
Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed,
touching the handle more than once will only result in
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected,
When ⬙Driver Door⬙ is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/
Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use
press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter RKE transmitter).
UNLOCK button. You must press the RKE transmitter
• Passive Entry
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When ⬙All Doors⬙ is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles
Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter
which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped.
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu, or push the back button on the
faceplate.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate. Refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
45 seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes button on the
touchscreen. Then press the back arrow/Done button on
the touchscreen.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the when exiting the vehicle. To change the “Headlight Off
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
Delay” status, press the ⬙Up⬙ or ⬙Down⬙ arrow button on
the touchscreen to select your desired time interval. Press
• Engine Off Power Delay
the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return
When this feature is selected, the power window to the previous menu.
switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped),
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if Audio
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen the
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening following settings will be available.
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
“Engine Off Power Delay” status, press the 0 seconds,
Engine Off Options
4
200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Balance/Fade
press the “Off,” “1,” “2,” or “3” button on the touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the touchThis feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
screen.
settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows
• Surround Sound
to adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center.
• Equalizer
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, press the Surround Sound button
This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble
on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off” followed by
settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting
pressing the arrow back button on the touchscreen.
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the • Loudness
touchscreen. Then press the arrow back button on the
Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To
touchscreen.
make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” The button will
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press highlight indicating that the setting has been selected.
Press the back arrow/Done button on the touchscreen
directly on the desired setting.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
• AUX Volume Offset
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201
To make your selection, press the “AUX Volume Match” SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3 After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchfollowed by pressing the back arrow button on the screen, the following settings will be available:
touchscreen.
• Tune Start
Phone/Bluetooth
Tune Start begins playing the current song from the
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
the twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song.
• Paired Phones
This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected
during that current song. Tune Start works in the backThis feature shows which phones are paired to the
ground, so you will not even realize it’s on, except that
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer
you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song
to the “Uconnect Supplement Manual.”
with only a few seconds left to play. To make your
• Paired Audio Sources
selection, press the “Tune Start” button on the touchThis feature shows which audio devices are paired to the screen, select “On” or “Off.”
Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer • Channel Skip
to the “Uconnect Supplement Manual.”
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
4
202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip
followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
• Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription
and is available for U.S. residents only.
Restore Settings
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Restore Settings
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the
Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking
⬙Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?”
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen select “Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the
to access the Subscription Information screen.
settings are restored, a pop up appears stating ⬙settings
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To reset to default.⬙ Press the okay button on the touchscreen
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on to exit.
the screen or visit the provider online.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203
Clear Personal Data
• System Information
After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the When System Information is selected, a System Informatouchscreen the following settings will be available:
tion screen will appear displaying the system software
version.
• Clear Personal Data
When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
button and a pop-up will appear asking ⬙Are you sure
you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to
Clear, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data has been cleared,
a pop up appears stating ⬙Personal data cleared.”
System Information
After pressing the “System Information” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
SRT Performance Pages
To access the SRT Performance Pages, press the “Apps”
button on the touchscreen then select the “SRT Performance Pages” App from the list. Press the UP or DOWN
buttons on the touchscreen to cycle through the list.
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the SRT Performance Pages is intended for off-highway or offroad use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
(Continued)
4
204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING! (Continued)
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the Performance Pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
CAUTION!
Check engine oil level at every fuel fill-up. Running
an engine with a low oil level can cause severe
engine damage. Engine oil level must be maintained
within the safe zone on the engine oil dipstick or
severe engine damage may occur. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
The SRT Performance Pages include the following:
• Home
• Timers
• G-Force
• Gauges 1
• Gauges 2
• Engine
• Options
The following describes each feature and its operation:
Timers
When the Timers Page is selected you will be able to
select from following “Tickets”:
• Current
Pressing the “Current” button displays a “real time”
summary of performance timers.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205
• Last
• Press the “Uconnect” button to save the runs to the
Owner web page.
Pressing the “Last” button displays the last recorded run
• Press the “Cancel” button to view the last timer
of performance timers.
“Ticket.”
• Best
The “Tickets” contain the timers listed below:
Pressing the “Best” button displays the best recorded run
• 0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h)
of performance timers, except for braking data.
• Save
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to
60 mph (0 to 100 km/h).
Pressing the “Save” button will let you save the last run.
Any saved run over 10, will overwrite the last saved run • ⅛ Mile (200 meter)
for Uconnect System storage. The operation of the Save Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ⅛ Mile
feature is listed below:
(200 meters).
• With a USB jump drive installed, press the “USB” • ¼ mile (400 meter)
button to save runs to the jump drive.
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ¼ mile
• With an SD Card installed, press the “SD Card” to save (400 meters).
runs to the SD Card.
4
206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Brake Distance
G-Force
Displays the distance it takes the vehicle to make a full When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force
stop. Contains current and last data for distance and start values (two lateral and two longitudinal) as well as
steering angle.
– from speed.
NOTE: The distance measurement will be aborted if the When a G-Force greater than zero is measured, the
brake pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a display will update the value real-time.
complete stop.
Gauges 1
• Brake Speed
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
Displays the speed the vehicle is traveling when the • Oil Temperature
brake pedal is depressed.
Displays the actual oil temperature.
NOTE: Brake Distance and Speed timers will only display ⬙ready⬙ when vehicle is traveling at greater than 30 • Oil Pressure
MPH (48 km/h).
Displays the actual oil pressure.
• Battery Voltage
Displays the actual battery voltage.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207
Gauges 2
Engine
When selected, this screen displays the following values: When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Coolant Temperature
• Speed (mph)
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
Displays the actual speed.
• Oil Temperature
• Horsepower (hp)
Displays the actual oil temperature.
Displays the actual horsepower.
• Intake Air Temperature
• Torque (ft-lb)
Displays the actual intake air temperature.
Displays the actual torque.
• Oil Pressure
• Oil Pressure (psi)
Displays the actual oil pressure.
Displays the actual oil pressure.
• Battery Voltage
Options
Displays the actual battery voltage.
When selected, this screen allows you to set your SRT
home page picture, and configure the vehicle color
shown in the G-Force screen.
4
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UCONNECT RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
iPod/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
For detailed information about your Uconnect radio,
refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual.
SD Card Slot, AUX Jack, And USB Port
1 — SD Card Slot
2 — AUX Jack
3 — USB Port
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
Located at the rear area of the center console, this feature
allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into
the USB port.
iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod
and iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may
not fully support the iPod control features. Please visit
Apple’s website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect Supplement Manual.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
The
right
hand
control
is
a rocker type switch with a
access the switches.
push-button in the center. Pushing the top of the switch
will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume.
4
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The button located in the center of the right hand control RADIO ANTENNA
will switch modes to Radio or other valid audio source. The am/fm radio antenna is located in the windshield.
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a The Satellite/Navigation antenna is located in the rear
push-button in the center. The function of the left hand liftgate, while the cellular phone antenna is on the
control is different depending on which mode you are in. windshield behind the interior rearview mirror.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES
each mode.
Under certain conditions, the mobile device being on in
Radio Operation
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
Pushing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch by relocating the mobile device antenna. This condition is
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
The button located in the center of the left hand control not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile device operation when
programmed in the radio pre-set buttons.
not using Uconnect (if equipped).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
General Information
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Buttons On The Faceplate
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
following conditions:
Uconnect touchscreen.
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel below the radio.
Automatic Climate Controls
4
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On The
Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen)
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
1. MAX A/C Button
Uconnect system touchscreen.
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator
will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.
Uconnect Temperature Controls
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
4. AUTO Temperature Control
6. Rear Defrost Button
Controls airflow temperature, distribution, volume, and
the amount of air recirculation automatically. Press and
release to select. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for
more information. Performing this function will cause
the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic
modes.
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is ON. Performing this function will cause the ATC
to switch into manual mode. The blower speed may
increase when Defrost mode is selected. If the front
defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return
the previous setting.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
4
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
7. Blower Control
Button On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
8. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
forced through the climate system. There are seven demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause as follows:
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
• Panel Mode
speeds can be selected using either the buttons on the
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen as follows:
panel. Each of these outlets can be individuButton On The Faceplate
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air
vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the knob counterclockwise.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
• Mix Mode
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located
below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This mode works best
of airflow from these outlets.
in cold or snowy conditions.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets 9. Climate Control OFF Button
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con- 10. Temperature Control Down Button
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
11. Temperature Control Up Button
Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
4
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
feature. Refer to the “Customer Programmable Feasystem to maintain by adjusting the driver and pastures — Uconnect System Settings” in this section of
senger temperature control buttons. Once the desired
the manual.
temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
automatically maintain that comfort level.
mode during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi- increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the Recirculation Control
system to function automatically.
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or high humidNOTE:
ity, or if rapid cooling is desired, you may wish to
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for recirculate interior air by pressing the RECIRCULATION
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts control button. Recirculation mode should only be used
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide temporarily. The recirculation LED will illuminate on the
blower control knob when this button is selected. Push
comfort as quickly as possible.
the button a second time to turn off the Recirculation
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric mode LED and allow outside air into the vehicle.
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window
clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these modes are selected.
Summer Operation
coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in
fresh air with the blower setting in high. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Window Fogging and Frosting
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in
Winter Operation
mild, rainy and/or humid weather. Windows may frost
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor- on the inside of the glass in very cold weather. To clear
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is function- the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase
ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concen- the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation
tration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper occur.
4
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will au- Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather
tomatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce Conditions
or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, can cause
odor, and if they enter the plenum they could plug the
water drains. In winter months, ensure the air intake is
clear of ice, slush and snow.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
PERSONALIZED MENU BAR
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the App screen.
The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar 2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace
are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow
an existing shortcut in the main menu bar.
these steps:
3. The replaced shortcut will now be an active App/
shortcut on the main menu bar.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and
tips you need to know to control your Uconnect 8.4AN
system.
Uconnect 8.4AN Main Menu
4
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Get Started
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
Uconnect 8.4AN
If you see the
icon on your touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect 8.4AN system.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
4
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Two buttons are all you need to control your Uconnect
system with your voice.
Voice Recognition (VR)/Phone Buttons
1 — Push To Begin Radio, Media, Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions
2 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 8.4AN
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
4
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you with
a list of commands.
Uconnect 8.4AN Radio
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your iPod or USB device. Your Voice
Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
song and genre information is displayed.
available for connected USB and iPod devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Media
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
• Change source to Bluetooth
• Change source to iPod
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
Uconnect 8.4AN Media
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone
button
and say “Call,” then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”
4
. After the beep, say one of
Push the Phone button
the following commands:
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
Uconnect 8.4AN Phone
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push
and say Listen. (Must have comthe Phone button
patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
. After the beep, say: “Reply.”
the Phone button
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat
one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system
prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in traffic.
See you later.
Start without
No.
I’ll be late.
me.
Okay.
Where are you?
I will be
<number>
Are you there
Call me.
minutes late.
yet?
I’ll call you
I need
See you in
later.
directions.
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost.
Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take
advantage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
4
iPhone Notification Settings
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Select “Settings”
Select “Bluetooth”
Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
Turn on “Show Notifications”
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but
if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
use your voice to send a text message.
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Climate (8.4AN)
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures handsfree and keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead.
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Set temperature to 70 degrees
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle.
Uconnect 8.4AN Climate
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button
the
beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and
become more productive when you know exactly how to
get to where you want to go.
Navigation (8.4AN)
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
the beep, say:
. After
. After
4
• For the 8.4AN Uconnect System, say: “Navigate to
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
Uconnect 8.4AN Navigation
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect Access (8.4AN)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the
road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1
and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X
(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.
NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access,
press the “Apps” button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to
get started. Detailed registration instructions can be
found on the next page.
NOTE: Uconnect Access is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental United States,
Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for details.
9-1-1 Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Horn and Lights
Yelp Search
Voice Texting
Roadside Assistance Call
Wi-Fi Hotspot***
***Extra charges apply.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
Vehicle Health Alert
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a
problem under the hood with one of your vehicles key
systems. For further information go to the Mopar Owner
Connect website moparownerconnect.com.
4
Register (8.4AN)
To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your
vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access.
1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.
Assist Button
2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen.
3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your
vehicle and handle all of the details.
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or,
” button on the touchscreen to
press the “Apps
“Register By Web” to complete the process using your
smartphone or computer.
For further information please visit DriveUconnect.com.
Mobile App (8.4AN)
You’re only a few steps away from using remote commands and playing your favorite music in your vehicle.
Mobile App
To link your internet radio accounts:
1. Download the Uconnect Access App to your mobile
device.
2. Press the Via Mobile icon on the navigation bar at the
bottom of the app.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
3. Press the app you’d like to connect to your vehicle.
Voice Texting (8.4AN)
. After
4. Enter your login information for the selected app and 1. To send a message, push the Phone button
the beep, say the following command: “Send mespress Link.
sage to John Smith.”
5. Next time you’re in your vehicle, enable Bluetooth,
pair your phone and select the Via Mobile app you 2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the
message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to
want to play from the Uconnect touchscreen to stream
process your message.
your personalized music.
3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
• You can also complete this process on the web. Simply
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect
visit moparownerconnect.com log in and click Set Up
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy
Via Mobile Profile (under Quick Links).
with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
• Once you download the app to your compatible You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a
mobile device, you will also be able to start your compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice
vehicle and lock/unlock its doors from virtually any- to send a personalized text message. For details about
where.
MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
NOTE:
4
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming
text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple
iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:
iPhone Notification Settings
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Select “Settings”
Select “Bluetooth”
Select the (i) for the paired vehicle
Turn on “Show Notifications”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
TIP:
1. Press the “Apps
” button on the touchscreen.
• Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone, but if 2. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.
your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can
3. Once the YELP home screen appears on the touchuse your voice to send a text message.
, then say: “YELP
screen, push the VR button
search.”
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be 4. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Uconnect the place or business that you’d like
illuminated to use the feature.
Uconnect to find.
Yelp (8.4AN)
Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your
voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you.
4
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4AN)
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a
wealth of information right to your Uconnect 8.4AN
system.
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands:
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
Yelp
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command. Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you
can use your voice to send text messages, schedule
meetings, set reminders, and more. For further information go to the Mopar Owner Connect website
moparownerconnect.com.
Do Not Disturb
SiriusXM Travel Link
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from
incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes
on the road and hands on the wheel. For your convenience there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while you were using Do
Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text
message, a call or both, when declining an incoming call
and send it to voicemail.
4
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Automatic reply messages can be:
General Information
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.” This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 charac- two conditions:
ters.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can been seen on the
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
received including interference that may cause undeWhile in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected
sired operation.
so you can still place a second call without being interNOTE:
rupted by incoming calls.
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex• Reply with text message is not compatible with iPpressly approved by the party responsible for complihones.
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on
phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
NOTE:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
Gulf Coast Countries (GCC)
Uconnect System Support:
Bluetooth
(24 hours a day 7 days a week) for U.S. residents
call: 1-877-855-8400 or visit DriveUconnect.com.
TRA
Dealer No: 0028019/10
Canadian residents (English) call:1-800-465-2001
Canadian residents (French) call:1-800-387-9983 or
visit DriveUconnect.ca.
Additional Information
Mon. – Fri., 8:00 am – 8:00 pm, ET
© 2015 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,
Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered
trademarks of Yelp.
Sat., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Register No: ER0095499/12
Sun., Closed
Uconnect Access Services Support: 1-855-792-4241 Please
have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you call.
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 䡵 TRACK USE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
▫ Guidelines For Track Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .256
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
▫ Shifting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
▫ Recommended Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
▫ Skip Shift Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
䡵 STREET/RACE MODE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .251 䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
䡵 LAUNCH MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
5
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Brake Pad Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .287
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .265
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
▫ Electronic Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .276
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .278
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .279 䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .296
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .284 䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .296
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .297
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
▫ Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300 䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . .309
▫ 8.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .305
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305 䡵 GROUND CLEARANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
5
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct any other occupant to buckle their seat
belt.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the Key Fob in
or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition of a vehicle
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Long periods of engine idling, especially at higher
than normal engine idle speeds, can cause excessive exhaust temperatures, which can damage your
vehicle. Do not leave your vehicle unattended with
the engine running.
• Running an engine with a low oil level can cause
severe damage. Check the engine oil level at every
fuel fill-up.
Normal Starting
CAUTION!
The engine in your vehicle is designed for operation
down to 0°F (-18°C). Starting the engine below 0°F
(-18°C) coolant temperature creates a potential for
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
CAUTION! (Continued)
scuffing or seizing of internal components in this
high performance engine. To prevent engine damage,
do not start the engine at temperatures below 0°F
(-18°C).
NOTE:
• Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
However, if the engine has not started within three
seconds, slightly press the accelerator pedal while
continuing to crank. If the engine fails to start within
15 seconds, wait five seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
To Start The Engine:
• You must disarm the security system in order to start
1. Fully apply the parking brake.
the engine. Refer to “Security Alarm System” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for 2. Press the clutch pedal to the floor.
further information.
NOTE: The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal
is pressed to the floor.
3. Place the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
5
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Push the red ENGINE START/STOP button located If Engine Fails To Start
on the instrument panel. Release the button when the
engine starts.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
Engine START/STOP Button
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started, ignite
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
WARNING! (Continued)
and damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may
be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or
the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can
be dangerous if done improperly, so follow this
procedure carefully. Refer to “Jump-Starting” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
If the engine is flooded, it may start to run, but not have
enough power to continue running when the ENGINE
START button is released. If this occurs, continue cranking up to 15 seconds with the accelerator pedal pushed
all the way to the floor. Release the accelerator pedal and
the ENGINE START button once the engine is running
smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the “Normal Starting” procedure should
be repeated.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
NOTE: The parking brake should be engaged and the
shift lever placed into REVERSE before leaving the
vehicle, especially when parked on an incline.
Your vehicle is equipped with a high torque capacity dual
disc clutch. The clutch pedal must be fully pressed to the
floor during each shift. As you release the clutch pedal,
lightly press the accelerator pedal.
5
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
• Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
pedal, or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause
abnormal wear on the clutch.
• Failure to press the clutch pedal fully to the floor
may cause increased shift efforts, and may result in
damage to the clutch and transmission.
• Do not rest your hand on the shift lever while
driving, as this may result in transmission damage.
• Do not attempt to shift the transmission if the rear
wheels are spinning due to loss of traction. Damage to the transmission may occur.
Failure to start out in first gear when moving forward
from a starting position may result in damage to the
clutch.
Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal and lift your foot off the
accelerator pedal before shifting gears. As you release the
clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal. Damage
to the transmission or clutch may occur if you do not
fully press the clutch pedal and lift off of the accelerator
pedal when shifting.
The six-speed manual transmission has a spring that
Ensure the transmission is in first gear when moving centers the shift lever near third and fourth gear. This
spring helps you know which gear you are in when you
forward from a standing position.
are shifting. Be careful when shifting from first to second
or downshifting from sixth to fifth.
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
The spring will try to pull the shift lever toward third and NOTE:
fourth gear. Make sure you move the shift lever into
• Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission reverse
second or fifth gear. If you let the shift lever move in the
inhibitor system. When vehicle speed is greater than
direction of the pulling, you may end shifting from first
3 mph (5 km/h), the reverse inhibitor activates to help
to fourth or from sixth to third gear.
prevent shifts into REVERSE. When at a complete stop,
You will find it easier to use only the lower gears for most
you may notice light shift efforts into REVERSE with
city driving. For steady highway driving with light
the ignition in the ON position, and increased shift
accelerations, sixth gear is recommended.
efforts into REVERSE with the ignition in the OFF
position. This is normal operation of the transmission
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or
reverse inhibitor system.
try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal
partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear on the • Shifting gears during cold weather may require an
clutch.
increased effort until the transmission lubricant is
warm. This is normal and not harmful to the transmisNever shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a
sion.
complete stop.
• Due to the high performance nature of your drivetrain,
a certain amount of noise from the transmission is
normal. This noise can be most noticeable when the
vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch engaged
5
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
(clutch pedal released), but it may also be heard when cruise conditions (relatively steady speeds) will result in
driving. The noise may also be more noticeable when increased fuel economy, and may be used as indicated.
the transmission is warm. This noise is normal and is
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
not an indication of a problem with your clutch or
transmission.
RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS
• You must always use first gear (or REVERSE) when
starting from a standing position.
CAUTION!
Always make sure the vehicle comes to a complete
stop before shifting into REVERSE. Failure to do so
may result in transmission damage.
Recommended Shift Speeds
To use your manual transmission for fuel economy it
should be upshifted as listed below. Shift at the vehicle
speeds listed for acceleration. Earlier upshifts during
mph
(km/h)
1-4
17
(27)
4-5
45
(72)
5-6
50
(80)
Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired
acceleration rate.
Skip Shift Indicator Light
There are times when you must shift the transmission directly from first gear into fourth gear
instead of from first gear into second gear. This
is to help you get the best possible fuel
economy from your vehicle. This occurs when engine
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
coolant is higher than 107°F (42°C), and vehicle speed is
greater than 16 mph (26 km/h) but less than 18 mph
(29 km/h), and engine speed is less than 1,550 RPM, and
the transmission is in first gear, and the accelerator is at
20% throttle or less. The “Skip Shift Indicator Light”
located in the tachometer will illuminate during these
times.
If you skip more than one gear while downshifting
or downshift at too high a vehicle speed, you could
damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.
When the “Skip Shift Indicator Light” illuminates, the
shift mechanism will only allow shifts from first gear to
fourth gear. After you shift the transmission into fourth
gear, you can press the clutch in and shift to another
forward gear.
Skipping more than one gear while downshifting,
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. You
could have a collision.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
STREET/RACE MODE — IF EQUIPPED
Downshifting - Proper downshifting will improve fuel
This vehicle is equipped with a two mode electronic
economy and prolong engine life.
controlled damping system. This system allows for a
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, down- compliant street suspension damping setting or a firmer
shift to maintain a safe speed when descending a steep race suspension damping setting. When in street mode
grade.
5
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
the system will automatically shift the suspension damp- NOTE:
ers to the firmer Race damping setting during some hard
• With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the susacceleration and braking situations. There are two modes
pension damping system will be in the last mode the
of operation:
system was in when the vehicle was turned off. The
• Street Mode — This mode will give a sporty, but
driver can select either Street or Race damping mode
at any time.
comfortable ride. This mode is driver selectable when
the vehicle is placed in STREET mode (push the
• The suspension mode will lock and stay in whatever
“STREET” button on the Instrument Panel). This mode
the driver selects even when the ignition is turned off
is intended for a smoother ride on the various types of
and the car restarted.
pavement and road conditions while still providing
damping levels appropriate extreme capabilities.
• The RACE setting will provide a much firmer ride.
• Race Mode — This mode is driver selectable when the • When RACE mode is enabled, a Shock symbol with
“RACE” next to it will light up in the instrument
vehicle is placed in RACE mode (push the “RACE”
button on the Instrument Panel). This mode is for track
cluster.
use only and will supply maximum grip to the tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
LAUNCH MODE
This system maximizes acceleration traction for straight
line racing.
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop on a level track
surface with the engine running.
2. Set the steering wheel for straight ahead driving.
5
3. Fully depress the clutch and select the first gear
position.
4. Push and release the “LAUNCH” button (located on
the steering wheel controls).
LAUNCH Button
5. Rapidly press the accelerator pedal to the floor within
one second.
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If the cluster launch DID message indicates all • Launch Mode can be used in any of the Electronic
conditions are correct for launch and the throttle is
Stability Control (ESC) Modes.
pressed to the floor quickly (within approximately 1/2
• Launch Mode should not be used within the first
second) the system will hold the engine speed to a preset
500 miles (805 km) of engine break-in.
speed (below the engine rev limiter speed).
6. Release the clutch aggressively. Do not ride the clutch.
WARNING!
Release the accelerator pedal to deactivate launch control. Pushing the launch control button or actuating the
brakes will also deactivate launch control.
Launch Mode is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be used on any public
roadways. It is recommended that this feature be
used in a controlled environment, and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
NOTE:
• Launch Mode brings the engine to optimum launch
RPM and waits for the driver to release the clutch.
Launch Mode then uses engine throttle only to achieve
controlled wheelslip for maximum acceleration
through first gear.
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
• Tire pressure:
– 35psi hot recommended. This typically can be
Guidelines For Track Use
achieved with cold pressures between 25 and 29 psi,
NOTE: Because of the extreme conditions encountered
depending on driver, track, and ambient conditions.
during track use, any damage or wear associated with
Conclusion Of Each Track Event
track use is not covered by warranty.
• It is recommended that a brake bleed procedure is
• It is recommended that the shocks be operated in
performed to maintain the pedal feel and stopping
RACE mode, if equipped.
capability of your brake system.
• ESC is track capable in all modes.
• It is recommended that each track outing should end
Prior To Each Track Event/Day
with a minimum of 1 cool down lap using minimal
braking.
• Verify all fluids are at the correct levels. Refer to “Fluid
TRACK USE
Capacities” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further • Following each track session, tires should be inspected
information.
for wear.
• Verify the front and rear brake pads have more than
½ pad thickness remaining. If the brake pads require
changing, please burnish prior to track outing at full
pace.
5
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
• All SRT vehicles are track tested for 24 hours of Acceleration
endurance, however, it is recommended that suspension system, brake system, prop shaft, and ½ shaft
WARNING!
boots should be checked for wear or damage after
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
every track event.
You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly
• Track usage results in increased operating tempera- have a collision. Accelerate slowly and carefully
tures of the engine, transmission, clutch, driveline and whenever there is likely to be poor traction (ice,
brake system. This may affect noise (NVH) counter- snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
measures designed into your vehicle. New components may need to be installed to return the system to
the original NVH performance.
For ACR models, please review the supplemental manual
for track tips.
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road 4. Keep tires properly inflated.
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To 5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
sudden stop.
be observed:
Traction
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy. DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Driving your vehicle through deep puddles at speeds
over 5 mph (8 km/h), may cause water to be ingested
into the engine. This can cause severe engine damage.
5
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
CAUTION!
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued)
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
5
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Power Steering Fluid Check
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
there is a problem with the power steering system.
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer- pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authoing pump may make noise for a short amount of time. rized dealer.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
CAUTION!
does not in any way damage the steering system.
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
CAUTION!
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
WARNING!
PARKING BRAKE
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
5
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Parking Brake Lever
The parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure you fully apply
the parking brake and shift the transmission into
REVERSE. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
The “Brake System Warning Light” in the instrument
cluster will turn on when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position and the parking brake is applied.
NOTE:
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied
or a brake/ABS system fault. It does not show the
As an added precaution when parking the vehicle, turn
degree of brake application. If the “Brake System
the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
Warning Light” is illuminated when the parking brake
and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
is not applied, please see your authorized dealer.
To apply the parking brake, grasp the handle and pull it • Each time the parking brake is applied, the instrument
rearward until you feel resistance. To release the parking
cluster will automatically go to the highest illuminabrake, grasp the handle and pull it slightly while pushing
tion setting regardless of the dimmer control setting.
the button on the end of the handle. When the button
drops into the handle (releasing the lock), guide the
handle downward to its stop and then release the button
and the handle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
injured seriously or fatally. Do not leave the key
fob in or near the vehicle (or in a location accessible
to children), and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Ensure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving. Failure to do so can lead to brake
failure, and an accident.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will
be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You may
notice increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the “Brake System Warning Light.”
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine off) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
5
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake Pad Break-In
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a high performance braking system. The brake pads are a semimetallic compound, which offer superior fade resistance
for consistent operation. A compromise to using this type
of brake pad is that the brakes may squeal slightly under
certain weather and operating conditions (.i.e., during
light brake applications).
The brakes on your new vehicle do not require a long
break-in period. However, you should avoid repeated
hard brake applications from high speeds during initial
break-in. In addition, you should avoid severe brake
loading, such as may be encountered when descending
long mountain grades.
Safe Operating Tips
WARNING!
To use your brakes and accelerator more safely,
follow these tips:
• Do not “ride” the brakes by resting your foot on the
pedal. This could overheat the brakes and result in
unpredictable braking action, longer stopping distances, or brake damage.
• When descending mountains or hills, repeated
braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking
control. Avoid repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission whenever possible.
• Do not drive too fast for road conditions, especially
when roads are wet or slushy. A wedge of water can
build up between the tire tread and the road. This
hydroplaning action can cause loss of traction,
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
WARNING! (Continued)
braking ability, and control.
• After going through deep water or a car wash,
brakes may become wet, resulting in decreased
performance and unpredictable braking action.
Dry the brakes by gentle, intermittent pedal action
while driving at very slow speeds.
Anti-Lock Brake System
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to aid the
driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse
braking conditions. The system operates with a separate
computer to modulate hydraulic pressure to prevent
wheel lock-up and help avoid skidding on slippery
surfaces.
NOTE: During severe braking conditions, a pulsing senELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
sation may occur and a clicking noise will be heard. This
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic is normal, indicating that the ABS is functioning.
brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake The ABS conducts a low-speed self-test at approximately
System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), and Elec- 12 mph (20 km/h). If you have your foot lightly on the
tronic Stability Control (ESC). All of these systems work brake pedal while this test is occurring, you may feel a
together to enhance vehicle stability and control in vari- slight pedal movement. The movement can be more
ous driving conditions.
apparent on ice and snow and be considered normal.
The ABS pump motor runs during the self-test at 12 mph
(20 km/h) and during an ABS stop. The pump motor
5
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
makes a low humming noise during operation, which is
normal.
WARNING! (Continued)
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting
equipment. This interference can cause possible
loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of
the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
(Continued)
CAUTION!
The Anti-Lock Brake System is subject to possible
detrimental effects of electronic interference caused
by improperly installed aftermarket radios or telephones.
WARNING!
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of an Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner, that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn
on and stay on briefly as a bulb check when the
ignition is first turned on. If the light does not
turn on during starting, have it repaired
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and promptly.
type as the original equipment and the tires must be
This light also illuminates at vehicle start-up to indicate
properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the
that the ABS self-check is in process. If the light remains
computer.
on after start-up, or turns on and remains on at road
speeds, it may indicate a system malfunction or that the
WARNING!
system is inoperative. In this case, the system reverts to
Significant over or underinflation of tires, or mixing standard non-anti-lock brakes. If this occurs, safely bring
sizes of tires or wheels on the vehicle can lead to loss the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible and
cycle the ignition to attempt to reset the ABS. If the light
of braking effectiveness.
remains on, see your authorized dealer immediately to
have the system serviced. Also, if the “BRAKE Warning
5
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
Light” and the “ABS Warning Light” are on, and the In full on mode ESC utilizes sensors in the vehicle to
parking brake is fully released, see your authorized determine the path that the driver intends to steer the
vehicle and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
dealer immediately.
When the actual path does not match the intended path,
Traction Control System (TCS)
the ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to
The TCS system monitors the amount of wheel spin of assist in counteracting the condition of oversteer or
each driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake understeer.
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
• Oversteer – when the vehicle is turning more than
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
stability.
• Understeer – when the vehicle is turning less than
Electronic Stability Control
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
In full on mode the TCS system enhances directional
control and stability of the vehicle under various driving
WARNING!
conditions. The ESC corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle by applying the brake of the appro- The Electronic Stability Control System (ESC) cannot
priate wheel. Engine power may also be reduced to assist prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on
in counteracting the condition of oversteer or understeer the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
and help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
WARNING! (Continued)
by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
all accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces,
or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Operating
Modes
5
ESC Button
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC system.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in
The ESC system may have five available operating
this mode. The ESC On mode should be used for most
modes:
driving situations. The ESC should only be turned OFF
for specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
ESC Full Off
The ESC Off mode is intended for off-highway or offroad use only and should not be used on any public
roadways. In this mode, all TCS and ESC stability features are turned OFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode, push
and hold the “ESC” switch for five seconds while the
vehicle is stopped with the engine running. After five
seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC OFF” telltale will
illuminate, and the “ESC OFF” message will display in
the vehicle cluster (left of the odometer). The “ESC OFF”
message may appear in the Driver Information Display
(DID). Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. To turn ESC ON again, momentarily push the
“ESC” switch.
WARNING!
With the ESC switched OFF, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. The “Full
Off” ESC mode is intended for off-highway or offroad only.
Sport Mode — If Equipped
Sport mode has reduced traction control and reduced
stability control. To enter the “Sport Mode” mode, push
the “ESC” switch once (located on the steering wheel).
The “ESC OFF” telltale will illuminate, and the “ESC
SPORT” message will display in the vehicle cluster (left
of the odometer). Refer to “Driver Information Display
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
WARNING!
WARNING!
When in Sport Mode, the TCS functionality of ESC,
(except for the limited slip feature described in the
TCS section), has been disabled, the “ESC Sport
Light” will illuminate, and the “ESC SPORT” message will display in the vehicle cluster. When in
Sport Mode, the engine power reduction feature of
TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is reduced.
When in Track Mode, the TCS functionality of ESC,
(except for the limited slip feature described in the
TCS section), has been disabled, the “ESC Track
Light” will illuminate, and the “ESC TRACK” message will display in the vehicle cluster. When in
Track Mode, the engine power reduction feature of
TCS is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
offered by the ESC system is greatly reduced. Track
Mode is intended for off-highway or off-road only.
Track Mode — If Equipped
Track Mode has no traction control and has reduced
stability control. To enter the “Track Mode” mode, push
the “ESC” switch twice. The “ESC OFF” telltale will
illuminate, and the “ESC TRACK” message will display
in the vehicle cluster (left of the odometer). Refer to
“Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Rain Mode
Rain mode offers increased traction control and stability
control for low traction conditions such as wet roads, dry
roads during cold temperatures, or when the driver
wants enhanced stability due to lack of familiarity or
experience with the vehicle’s response. To enter the
“Rain Mode” mode, push the “ESC” switch three times.
5
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
The “ESC Rain Light” will illuminate, and the “ESC TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
RAIN” message will display in the vehicle cluster (left of Tire Markings
the odometer). Refer to “Driver Information Display
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Some models may not offer “Sport” or “Track”
Mode.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designaT145/80D18 103M.
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
NOTE:
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
5
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING 275
EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
– ⬙R⬙ means radial construction, or
– ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
5
276 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
STARTING AND OPERATING 277
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
278 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
STARTING AND OPERATING 279
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
5
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
280 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
STARTING AND OPERATING 281
Loading
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting
And Operating” section of this manual.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occugross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” secpassengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
tion of this manual.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
5
282 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followbe five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
is 650 lbs (294 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
650 lbs [294 kg]).
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
• For the following example, the combined weight of
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
capacity calculated in step 4.
(392 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 283
5
284 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result
in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 285
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
ride.
NOTE:
Tire Inflation Pressures
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the door.
vehicle to drift left or right.
5
286 STARTING AND OPERATING
At least once a month:
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidepocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
wall.
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under- Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
inflated.
temperature changes.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
CAUTION!
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, althe Winter.
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
which could damage the valve stem.
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure outside temperature condition.
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than
STARTING AND OPERATING 287
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle Radial Ply Tires
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
WARNING!
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operatCombining radial ply tires with other types of tires
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
5
288 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Repair
Tire Types
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it All Season Tires — If Equipped
meets the following criteria:
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,
Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
between different all season tires. All season tires can be
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm). failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more information, contact an authorized dealer.
STARTING AND OPERATING 289
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
WARNING!
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more information.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
There are no snow tires that are compatible with the NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
wheels on this vehicle.
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
5
290 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 291
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. first opportunity.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
5
292 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
replaced.
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Tire Spinning
STARTING AND OPERATING 293
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread • Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
5
294 STARTING AND OPERATING
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main- wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivatenance schedule is highly recommended.
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
WARNING!
“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure. Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
You could lose control and have a collision resulting equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart exin serious injury or death.
ample found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little this manual for more information relating to the Load
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
Replacement Tires
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for those of the original wheels.
STARTING AND OPERATING 295
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
5
296 STARTING AND OPERATING
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction devices
smooth, quiet ride.
are not recommended.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
CAUTION!
maintenance interval. Remember, more frequent rotation
is permissible if desired. Also, correct for anything causDamage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are ing rapid or unusual wear prior to performing the tire
used.
rotation.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
NOTE: Each wheel on your vehicle contains a tire pressure sensor. The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
learns the location of each sensor though system programming. Although not required, the manufacturer
recommends reprogramming the TPMS after rotating the
tires so that the system can relearn each sensor’s location.
See your authorized dealer for system reprogramming.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
The front and rear tires are different sizes and cannot be
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
used in place of each other. Rotate the tires “side-to-side”
as shown in the diagram.
STARTING AND OPERATING 297
readings to the receiver module. It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on
your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure. The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four TPM sensors
• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Driver
Information Display (DID)
• TPM Telltale Light
Tire Rotation
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each 1 psi (7.0 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
5
298 STARTING AND OPERATING
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting And Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM
Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically
update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to urn ON the TPM
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
STARTING AND OPERATING 299
TPM Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
5
300 STARTING AND OPERATING
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire readings to the receiver module. It is particularly importread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and tant for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on
your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper presstopping ability.
sure. The TPMS consists of the following components:
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain • Receiver module
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
• Four TPM sensors
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
• Various TPMS messages which display in the Driver
to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light.
Information Display (DID)
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in • TPM Telltale Light
the tire.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure tires. In addition, the Driver Information Display (DID)
will display a ⬙LOW TIRE⬙ message and a graphic
STARTING AND OPERATING 301
showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire Driver Information Display (DID) will display a ⬙SERpressure values changing color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ mes- VICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
sage will also be displayed.
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
received.
and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those
in a different color in the DID graphic) to the vehicle’s If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
recommended cold placard pressure inflation value as providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the system no longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longer
receives the updated tire pressures, the system will flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no
automatically update, the graphic display in the DID will longer display, and a pressure value will display in place
change color back to the original color, and the TPM of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
Telltale Light will turn off. The vehicle may need to be following:
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will 2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
materials that may block radio wave signals.
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
5
302 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or General Information
wheel housings.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
following two conditions:
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.
The DID will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system (2) This device must accept any interference received,
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is including interference that may cause undesired operadetected. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ tion.
message is then followed with a graphic display with NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pres- by the party responsible for compliance could void the
sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors user’s authority to operate the equipment.
but they may not be located in the correct vehicle
position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 303
Gulf Coast Countries (GCC)
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
TPMS
8.4L Engine
TRA
REGISTERED No: ER0097573/12
DEALER No: DA0047074/10
CORAX3
TRA
REGISTERED No: ER37066/15
DEALER No: DA0047074/10
The 8.4L engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations, provide optimal
fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded “Premium”
gasoline having a posted octane number of
91 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of 91 or
higher octane “Premium” gasoline is required for in this
engine.
While operating on gasoline with the required octane
number, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine
is not a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended
octane number can cause engine failure and may void or
not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
304 STARTING AND OPERATING
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxysymptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid- genates such as ethanol.
ering service for the vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide improved performance and durability of engine and fuel
system components.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% ethanol (E-10). Use of
these blends may result in starting and drivability
problems, damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,
and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to
illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they
should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater
than 10% ethanol (E-10).
Problems that result from using gasoline containing more
than 10% ethanol (E-10) or gasoline containing methanol
STARTING AND OPERATING 305
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may MMT In Gasoline
void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
Warranty.
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasobeyond gasoline of the same octane number without
line containing up to 10% ethanol (E-10). Gasoline with
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limlife and reduces emissions system performance in some
ited Warranty.
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
• Operate in a lean mode.
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
and California reformulated gasoline.
• Poor engine performance.
Materials Added To Fuel
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane
rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
5
306 STARTING AND OPERATING
stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines Fuel System Cautions
that have these additives will help improve fuel
economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle perforCAUTION!
mance. Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline contains a higher level of detergents to further aide in Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
minimizing engine and fuel system deposits. When avail- performance:
able the usage of Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recom- • The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal
law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine permended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
formance and damage the emissions control sysDetergent Gasoline Retailers.
tem.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should • An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
and varnish removal may contain active solvents or
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
and diaphragm materials.
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 307
CAUTION! (Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
(Continued)
5
308 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the
nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refueling.
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
ADDING FUEL
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
1. Push the fuel filler door release switch (located in the
driver’s door map pocket).
6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
2. Open the fuel filler door.
NOTE: A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the spare tire area) to open the flapper door to allow for
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the emergency refueling with a gas can.
fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel
CAUTION!
door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the
door.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
pipe seals the system.
off” the fuel tank after filling.
STARTING AND OPERATING 309
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Locate the carpet access door (on the right side inner
trim panel of the trunk).
5
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release procedure by following the
proceeding steps.
Carpet Access Door
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Pull the edge of the access door on the right side inner 4. Pull the release cable to release the fuel door.
trim panel to expose the emergency release cable.
Release Cable
Edge Of Access Door
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
5
Fuel Door Open
Carpet Into Original Position
5. Return the release cable to the original position (inside TRAILER TOWING
the inner trim panel) and push the carpet back into the
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
original position.
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground)
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
Wheels OFF The Ground
None
Front
Rear
All
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing, make sure all four
wheels are off the ground.
Manual Transmission
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT RECOMMENDED
OK
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
GROUND CLEARANCE
The front and rear fascias and side sills ride low and
ground clearance is limited.
CAUTION!
Damage to the front and rear fascias and side sills can
occur if you disregard the low ground clearance in
these areas of your vehicle. Pay close attention when
parking to avoid running into parking curbs. Exercise caution when entering or exiting steep driveways, or when pulling off the road onto soft shoulders.
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHER . . . . . . . . . . .316
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions . . . . . . . . .321
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .316
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . .323
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .329
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .334
䡵 TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .319
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .320
6
316 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flasher
may wear down your battery.
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
center of the instrument panel above the climate controls. IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning potential for overheating by taking the appropriate acflasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- tion.
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
• On the highways — Slow down and use the highest
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to
gear possible.
turn off the Hazard Warning flasher.
• In city traffic — While stopped, put the transmission
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for • In city traffic — While moving, shift into the highest
gear possible to reduce engine RPM.
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 317
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
an impending overheat condition:
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
properly calibrated torque wrench.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control Torque Specifications
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
**Lug Nut/
Lug Nut/
from the engine cooling system.
Bolt Size
Bolt Socket
Size
WARNING!
107 Ft-Lbs (145 N·m)
1/2” x 20
19 mm
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
6
318 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Wheel Mounting Surface
Torque Patterns
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 319
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located in the left side of the trunk.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) in the tire tread
can be sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects
(e.g., screws or nails) should not be removed from the
tire. Tire Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures
down to approximately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
6
Tire Service Kit Location
320 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position for air pump operation only. Use the
Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Tire Service Kit Components
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Sealant Bottle
Deflation Button
Pressure Gauge
Power Button
5 — Mode Select Knob
6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
8 — Power Plug (located on the bottom side of the Tire Service Kit)
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
position to inject the Tire Service Kit Sealant and
to inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6)
when selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release the Power
Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire Service Kit.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 321
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and
Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at
the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to
“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F)
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
6
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
use. Always replace these components immediately at
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
322 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob
(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to
avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit
Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than 1/4
inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4 inch (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 323
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit sealant is harmful if inhaled,
swallowed, or absorbed through the skin. It causes
skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon as
possible, if there is any contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
(Continued)
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat
6
324 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
on the ground. This will provide the best positioning 4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated
valve stem.
tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
necessary to place the valve stem in this position
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
before proceeding.
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
in Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition
nails) from the tire.
in the OFF position.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
4. Set the parking brake.
Deflated Tire:
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
• After pushing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
deflated tire.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 325
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
tire.
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve 1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds).
Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.
As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the
Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant
Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar).
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the Power
The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from
Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure
when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if 2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediavailable. Make sure the engine is running before
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
use. Call for assistance.
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
6
326 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vethe vehicle further. Call for assistance.
hicle.”
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recomCAUTION!
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant con1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
tacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s inteKit.
rior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Tire Service Kit components which may cause
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrupermanent damage to the kit.
ment panel.
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 327
(D) Drive Vehicle:
(E) After Driving:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
Mode position.
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced
after using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph
(90 km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure
to follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve
stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
6
328 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
panel after the tire has been repaired.
1. Push the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire 6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
and loading information label on the driver-side door
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as posopening.
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom- NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authomended inflation pressure before continuing.
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 (F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
Volt outlet.
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
the vehicle.
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
3. Push the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
service center.
of it accordingly.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 329
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
the front of the housing. Push the bottle into the
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be hurt by the fan.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started, ignite
and damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may
be used to obtain a start from another vehicle. This
type of start can be dangerous if done improperly,
so follow this procedure carefully.
• Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
6
330 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: The battery is located underneath an access Connecting The Jumper Cables
panel inside the rear compartment on the left side of the
vehicle. A remote battery terminal is located in the engine 1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an
compartment for jump-starting.
inadvertent electrical contact.
2. When boost is provided by a battery in another vehicle,
park that vehicle within booster cable reach, but without
allowing the vehicles to touch one another.
3. Set the parking brake, place the transmission in NEUTRAL, and turn the ignition OFF on both vehicles.
4. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical loads.
Battery Location
1 — Positive Battery Post
2 — Negative Battery Post
5. Remove the plastic fuse cover to gain access to the
remote jump-start positive (+) post in the engine
compartment. Refer to the following illustration for
remote jump-starting connections.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 331
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
6. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
7. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Remote Jump Start Connections
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
8. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
9. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
6
332 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
10. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then 4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle
battery.
with the discharged battery.
11. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
in the reverse sequence:
you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 333
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between 1st gear
and REVERSE, while gently pushing the accelerator.
Use the least amount of pressure to maintain the rocking
motion, without spinning the wheels, or racing the
engine.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between 1st gear and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
6
334 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck. And do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Only use flatbed
equipment. Always comply with applicable state or local
towing ordinances.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 8.4L . . . . . . . . . .337
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . .338
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .342
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
▫ Hibernation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
▫ Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
7
336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
▫ Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
▫ Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
▫ Front Headlamp, Front Park/Turn Signal
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . .384
▫ Taillamp, Tail/Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
▫ Rear Turn Signal Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
▫ Backup Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
▫ Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
GENUINE
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 337
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 8.4L
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Coolant Pressure Cap
Engine Oil Dipstick
Power Distribution Center
Remote Jump Start Positive Battery Post
6
7
8
9
— Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir
— Engine Oil Fill
— Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
— Air Cleaner Filter
338 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
CAUTION!
To meet new government regulations and promote
cleaner air, your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Prolonged driving with the light on could cause
onboard diagnostic system called OBD II. This system further damage to the emission control system. It
monitors the performance of the emissions and engine could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
control systems. When these systems are operating prop- vehicle must be serviced before any state emissions
erly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and tests can be performed.
fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within
If the light is flashing, severe catalytic converter damage
current government regulations.
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system required.
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light. It will also
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
store diagnostic codes and other information to assist
Cybersecurity
your service technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, see Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic
system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to
your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
information related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may need to
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 339
access this information to assist with the diagnosis and For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices — If
service of your vehicle and emissions system.
Equipped With Uconnect 8.4 Radio” and “Uconnect
CyberSecurity” in “All About Uconnect Access” in your
Owner’s Manual Radio Supplement and “Cybersecurity”
WARNING!
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” in your
• ONLY an authorized service technician should con- Owner’s Manual on the DVD.
nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in
order to diagnose or service your vehicle.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the PROGRAMS
OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
tracking device, it may:
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
• Be possible that vehicle systems, including
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
safety related systems, could be impaired or a
For states that require an Inspection and Mainteloss of vehicle control could occur that may result
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
in an accident involving serious injury or death.
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
• Access, or allow others to access, information
stored in your vehicle systems, including per- on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
sonal information.
7
340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
happen:
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
not proceed to the I/M station.
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
following:
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off
position or start the engine. This means that your
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed
to the I/M station.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
start this test over.
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
check.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine DEALER SERVICE
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personRegardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced available which include detailed service information for
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine attempting any procedure yourself.
running.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
REPLACEMENT PARTS
penalties being assessed against you.
Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to enWARNING!
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
You can be badly injured working on or around a
caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
Limited Warranty.
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
7
342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform
repairs and service when necessary could result in
more costly repairs, damage to other components or
negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an
authorized dealer or qualified repair center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a flush is needed because of component malfunction, use only the specified fluid for the flushing
procedure.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 343
Engine Oil
Change Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the oil level is approximately five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will
give you an incorrect reading.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the
requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12633.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground also
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Add
The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic
oil only when the level is below the SAFE mark.
0W-40 or equivalent engine oil.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
7
344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
Use MOPAR SAE 0W-40 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-12633 such as Pennzoil Ultra
equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartyour area.
ment” in this section.
Engine Oil Filter
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num- The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
ber should not be used.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345
Engine Oil Filter Selection
WARNING! (Continued)
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
maintenance intervals.
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recomWARNING!
mended.
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
(Continued)
7
346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Some aftermarket air cleaners and filters can cause
mass air flow sensor issues which can lead to a
driveability problem or a limp home condition.
Maintenance-Free Battery
The top of the maintenance-free battery is vented, and
must be replaced with a vented battery.
The battery is located underneath an access panel inside
the rear compartment on the left side of the vehicle. A
remote battery terminal is located in the engine compartBattery Location
ment for jump-starting. Refer to “Jump-Starting Proce1 — Positive Battery Post
dures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further 2 — Negative Battery Post
information.
To gain access to the battery, remove the floor portion of
the rear compartment carpet.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Hibernation Mode
The Hibernation mode feature conserves battery power
when storing the vehicle. It allows for up to three months
7
348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
of storage time without losing radio and engine control- 3. Push the right arrow button on the steering wheel
controls for one second. Vehicle will countdown from
ler adaptive memory. Using this feature is an alternative
ten seconds and enter Hibernation Mode.
to disconnecting the battery.
NOTE: This vehicle is designed to sit in storage with a NOTE: You may push the right arrow button on the
fully charged battery for up to 30 days. If you plan to steering wheel controls during the countdown to abort
store the vehicle longer than 30 days, we recommend Hibernation Mode.
doing one of the following:
To Deactivate Hibernation Mode
• Disconnect the battery.
1. Push the RKE UNLOCK button to unlock the vehicle.
• Use the battery charger.
2. Push the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
• Put the vehicle into Hibernation mode (3-month
Air Conditioner Maintenance
charge).
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
1. Cycle the ignition switch to (ACC).
at the start of each warm season. This service should
2. Select Hibernation mode within the Driver Informa- include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
tion Display (DID).
time.
To Activate Hibernation Mode
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
7
350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Body Lubrication
Wiper Blades
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge
or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and
help reduce streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield or rear window.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield or rear window. Make sure that they are
not frozen to the glass before turning them on to avoid
damaging the blade. Keep the wiper blade out of contact
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the passenger side of
the vehicle. Be sure to check the fluid level in the
reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not engine coolant (antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to flush
out the residual water.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
7
352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 353
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is immotion.
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
damage.
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control • Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
against you.
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe Cooling System
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
WARNING!
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or cycle the ignition
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage:
(Continued)
7
354 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
condenser/radiator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden
hose vertically down the face of the condenser/radiator.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
Coolant Checks
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antiCheck engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12 freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
the system should be drained, flushed, and refilled
with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by
an authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 355
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
(Continued)
7
356 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10
Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact your authorized
dealer for assistance.
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deioning this extended maintenance period, it is important that
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 357
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
NOTE:
Cooling System Pressure Cap
• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper
level of protection against freezing according to the
temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is
operated.
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to insure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
WARNING!
needed to be added to the system, please contact your
local authorized dealer.
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recomcooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
(Continued)
7
358 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 359
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to • Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antimaintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032
expansion bottle must also be protected against freezshould be added to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
ing.
Points To Remember
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
for leaks.
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporMS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
components.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
7
360 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
WARNING! (Continued)
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
Brake System
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
To ensure brake system performance, all brake system if the brake system warning light indicates system failcomponents should be inspected periodically. Refer to ure.
“Maintenance Schedule” for the proper maintenance
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when perintervals.
forming underhood services.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
(Continued)
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up
to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 361
With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused
by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a accident.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
(Continued)
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. Use
of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial boiling
point or unidentified as to specification, may result in
sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking.
WARNING!
7
362 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in an accident.
Manual Transmission
Transmission Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid in the transmission when performing
other underbody services.
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug located on
the left side of the transmission. The fluid level should be
approximately 1/4 in (6.4 mm) below the bottom of the
Brake fluid will tend to absorb moisture from the atmofill hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper
sphere over time. If the fluid becomes contaminated with
level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in
water, brake performance will deteriorate. Therefore, the
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
brake fluid must be changed at the intervals specified in
the “Maintenance Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance NOTE: DO NOT overfill transmission, damage can
Schedule” for further information. See your authorized occur.
dealer for service.
Change Brake Fluid
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 363
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or damage to the
transmission. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And
Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Axle
Axle Lubricant Level Check
Check the exterior of the axle for evidence of gear oil
leakage every 12 months or 6,000 miles (10 000 km). This
check should be made with the vehicle level and on the
Change Transmission Fluid
ground or raised on an axle and wheel type hoist. The
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte- axle lubricant level should be between the bottom of the
nance intervals. If contaminated with water, change the filler plug and a point approximately 3/8 inch (9.5 mm)
fluid immediately. See your authorized dealer for service. below the filler plug. If adding axle lubricant, use only
the manufacturer’s recommended axle lubricant. Refer to
Hydraulic Clutch
“Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Master Cylinder — Clutch Fluid Level Check
Your Vehicle” for further information.
The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated
volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder
reservoir. In the event of leakage or wear, use only the
7
364 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Using axle fluid other than the manufactured recommended fluid may cause a shudder/noise issue. refer
to “Fluids, Lubes, And Genuine Parts” in “ Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper mainte- resistance built into your vehicle.
nance intervals. Change the lubricant immediately if
contaminated with water. See your authorized dealer for Washing
service.
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
clear water.
Change Axle Lubricant
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo- • If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumugraphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
and Tar Remover to remove.
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 365
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a nonCAUTION!
abrasive, non-acidic cleaner.
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
CAUTION!
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
7
366 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor
Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives
or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND
WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis
this is all that is required to maintain this finish.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
CAUTION!
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,
suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,
painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may
cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 367
CAUTION!
Damage caused by these type of products may not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean the leather. Application
of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the
original condition.
Glass Surfaces
CAUTION!
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or windows
Leather Or Vinyl Seat/Trim Care And Cleaning
equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
Leather is best preserved by regular cleaning with a other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.
damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt can act as an When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
abrasive and damage the leather surface and should be towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
removed immediately with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils directly on the mirror.
can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total
Clean or equivalent. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking the leather with any liquid. Please do not use
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
7
368 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or
abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a
clean damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric. Aero Group (Front Splitter) — If Equipped
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
The front splitter will not flex or compress against
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or impacts from the front. If an impact does occur, have the
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the splitter inspected. A cracked or delaminated splitter
vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
should be replaced.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 369
CAUTION!
Use care when approaching parking blocks, tall
speed bumps and garage curbs. These surfaces can
damage your splitter and fascia.
Use caution when driving up to sloped surfaces or over
speed bumps. Approaching a speed bump or a slope at a
slight angle may improve your clearance.
CAUTION!
Front Splitter
Always leave ample room and be sure to educate anyone
you allow to operate the vehicle.
• Hard contact with steep ramps may cause damage
to your splitter and fascia.
• Replace rub strips when they are worn down to 1/8
inch (3 mm) on the front edge. This will avoid
damage to the carbon fiber panel.
Refer to the ACR Owner’s Manual Supplement for
information specific to the ACR.
7
370 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Water may drain slowly from the ends of the wing after
Do not operate the vehicle with the rear wing removed. washing or exposure to rain, this is normal. Opening the
The aerodynamic balance of this set up is unstable and liftgate will expedite drainage.
can cause a loss of control.
Rear Wing — If Equipped
WARNING!
Use extra caution when closing the rear deck lid on a
vehicle equipped with a rear wing. Due to the added
weight of the rear wing the deck lid will close at a
higher rate of speed and can cause injury.
Carbon Fiber — If Equipped
The clear coated carbon fiber panels will have some
variation and minor waviness in the woven pattern. This
is inherent to the process and a sign of its authenticity.
Rear Wing
All carbon fiber materials are susceptible to UV degradation during long exposure to the sun. The woven
carbon components use the latest technology in the resin
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 371
system and the clear coat. As with any automotive
coating, storing your vehicle in a covered location will
guarantee a long lasting finish.
The rear wing is molded with unidirectional carbon fiber
and painted in body color. Some patterned or linear
conditions may be visible in the painted carbon fiber
surfaces. This is also a normal result of the carbon fiber
process.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
7
372 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Distribution Center
The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle. This
center contains fuses and relays.
Power Distribution Center
Cavity
3
4
5
6
Relay
—
—
—
—
Cartridge Fuse
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
Mini-Fuse
—
—
—
—
Description
Rad Fan
Rad Fan Rly High
ABS/ESP Pump Feed
Starter
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 373
Cavity
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Relay
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Cartridge Fuse
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
Jumper Black
25 Amp Clear
—
14
15
16
17
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
18
19
—
—
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
Mini-Fuse
—
—
—
—
—
—
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
25 Amp circuit breaker
—
—
Description
CBC (Ext. Lighting #1)
CBC (Ext. Lighting #2)
CBC (Lighting, Washer Pump)
CBC (Power Lock)
B+ Jumper
ABS/ESP Valve Feed
Horn
A/C Clutch
Diagnostic, Fuel Door, Stop Switch
KIN, RF Hub
Power Seats
Driver Door Mod
Passenger Door Mod
7
374 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
20
21
22
23
24
Relay
—
—
—
—
—
Cartridge Fuse
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
Jumper Black
—
—
25
—
—
26
—
—
27
—
—
28
29
30
—
—
—
—
40 Amp Green
20 Amp Yellow
Mini-Fuse
—
—
—
15 Amp Blue
25 Amp
Clear
25 Amp
Clear
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
—
—
—
Description
Rear Window Defroster
Wiper
B+ Jumper
HVAC MOD, Cluster, ICS-Switch Bank
PCM-Powertrain Control Module
Fuel Pump
ASD #1
ASD #2
Spare
HVAC Blower
RR Power Outlet, Adj. Pedals, UCI
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 375
Cavity
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Relay
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Cartridge Fuse
Jumper Black
—
20 Amp Blue
Jumper Black
—
—
—
—
39
40
41
42
43AC
—
—
G8VA
G8VA
—
—
—
—
—
—
Mini-Fuse
—
—
—
—
—
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp Red
—
—
—
2 Amp Grey
Description
B+ Jumper
Spare
Run Acc relay
B+ Jumper
Spare
ORC Mod Run
Cluster, Camera
Active Damping Suspension
HVAC Module, In Vehicle Temp, Blower Relay
Spare
Run/Start
Fuel Door
SCCM
7
376 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
(Forward
Fuse)
43BE
(Rearward
Fuse)
44AC
(Forward
Fuse)
44BE
(Rearward
Fuse)
45
Relay
Cartridge Fuse
Mini-Fuse
Description
—
—
10 Amp Red
Corax
—
—
10 Amp Red
Rear View Mirror, Aux Port Jumper.
—
—
10 Amp Red
IBS
—
—
10 Amp Red
PCM-Powertrain Control Module, Fuel Pump Relay.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 377
Cavity
46
47
48
49
Relay
—
—
—
—
Cartridge Fuse
—
—
—
—
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
HC Micro
HC Micro
HC Micro
HC Micro
HC Relay
HC Micro
HC Micro
G8VA
G8VA
HC Micro
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Mini-Fuse
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
25 Amp
Clear
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Description
ESC Module, Stop Lamp Switch
ORC Module, Passenger Seat OCM
SCCM
Amplifier
Rad Fan
Rad Fan Relay SER/PAR
Starter Relay
Rear Window Defroster Relay
Rad Fan Relay High
Wiper ON/OFF
Wiper LO/HI
Horn Relay
A/C Clutch Relay
HVAC Blower
7
378 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
Relay
HC Micro
G8VA
G8VA
HC Micro
HC Micro
G8VA
—
Cartridge Fuse
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Mini-Fuse
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
NOTE: A 15 Amp fuse for the radio system is located
in-line at the battery positive terminal.
Description
Fuel Pump
Run Relay #1
Run Relay #2
ASD #1
ASD #2
Run Accy #1, Pop Up, Driver Door Window Switch
Spare
CAUTION! (Continued)
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
(Continued)
(Continued)
CAUTION!
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 379
CAUTION! (Continued)
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
• Make sure that all tires are inflated to the optimum
pressure.
• Wash and wax the vehicle to protect the finish.
• Store the vehicle in a dry, well-ventilated location.
• Move the wiper blades away from the windshield.
• Block the wheels. Do not apply the parking brake.
We recommend that you follow these guidelines for
• Cut blocks of plywood about the same size of the tires.
storing your vehicle for extended periods.
Cover each block with indoor/outdoor carpeting and
• Fill the fuel tank. This will prevent water condensation
place them between the tires and concrete. This will
inside the tank. If you plan to store your vehicle more
prevent tire flat spotting.
than two months, add an anti-oxidant fuel stabilizer to
• For long-term storage, remove the tires and put the
the fuel tank.
vehicle up on blocks. Stack the tires on plywood and
• Change the oil to remove any corrosive combustion
cover with a tarp to prevent flat spotting.
related acids in the crankcase.
• Check that the radiator coolant level of protection is to
at least -20°F (-29°C).
7
380 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If the vehicle will be subjected to freezing temperatures, either remove the battery and store it in a dry,
well ventilated area or connect a trickle charger
(1.5 Amp) with automatic shutdown / overcharge
protection to the battery. However, do not leave the
trickle charger hooked up to the battery without being
plugged in to a 110 Volt AC outlet, as this will result in
further drain on the vehicle’s battery. If the vehicle is
not going to be driven in the next three weeks, perform
the battery recharge procedure in the Service Manual.
Then, either disconnect the battery at the negative
terminal or use the “Battery Save Feature” to conserve
battery power. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures/
Battery Save Feature” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”
for further information.
NOTE: Disconnecting the battery causes the engine control system to lose memory of some “learned” functions.
After reconnecting the battery, the engine may run rough
until the control module “relearns” these functions. Using the Battery Save Feature will prevent the engine
controller from loosing its memory.
CAUTION!
Use care when disconnecting the remote positive
cable. It is connected to the battery and can short out
to any metal on the vehicle. Always tape or wrap the
exposed cable end to prevent electrical shorts.
Check the battery every four to six weeks to ensure that
the voltage is above 12.10 Volts. The voltage will drop
• Cover the vehicle whenever possible to prevent acci- more rapidly in hot temperatures. If battery voltage
dental damage to the finish.
drops below 12.10 Volts, follow the battery recharge
procedure in the Service Manual.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 381
NOTE: To help prevent the battery from discharging Use the remote transmitter to set the alarm. If the alarm
during shorter periods of inactivity, perform the follow- SET light comes on and flashes, the system is operating
ing:
properly. If not, there is a problem with a switch or the
system. See your authorized dealer for service.
1. Make sure that the liftgate, hood, doors, windows are
completely closed.
If you plan to store the vehicle longer than 30 days, we
recommend using Hibernation Mode to conserve bat2. Make sure that Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmittery power. Refer to “Hibernation Mode” in Mainteter is operating and that the battery is good.
nance Procedures for further information.
3. Make sure that the HOOD, LIFTGATE, and DOOR
switches are in adjustment. Perform the quick system
check, which follows:
7
382 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Message Center Indicators
Cluster
Gauge Pack
Heater Control
Interior Lamp
Courtesy Foot Well Lights
Cargo Lamp (Coupe Liftgate)
Bulb Number
Serviced at Authorized Dealer
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Serviced at Authorized Dealer
Serviced at Authorized Dealer
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
W3W
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 383
Exterior Bulbs
Low/High Beam Headlamp
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp
Daytime Running Lamp (DRL)
Front Side Marker Lamp
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
Tail/Stop/Turn Signal Lamp
Rear Marker Lamp
Backup Lamp
License Lamp
Bulb Number
HID (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
2821M
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
2821M
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
7
384 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Taillamp, Tail/Stop Lamp
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
Front Headlamp, Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
Rear Turn Signal Lamp
For bulb replacement, see your authorized dealer.
Backup Lamps
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 385
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
Engine Oil With Filter
We recommend you use synthetic SAE 0W-40, API Certified.
Transmission
We recommend you use MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Rear Axle
We recommend you use Castrol SAF-XJ/SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Gear and Axle Lubricant.
Cooling System *
We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
(OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent).
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
16 Gallons
Metric
60.6 Liters
11 Quarts
10.4 Liters
3.4 Quarts
3.2 Liters
1.5 Quarts
1.4 Liters
16 Quarts
15 Liters
7
386 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT coolant conforming
to MS.90032.
We recommend you use a full synthetic 0W-40 engine oil
such as MOPAR or Pennzoil Ultra or equivalent engine
oil.
We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filters.
We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.
We recommend you use Unleaded 91 Octane Only or
Higher, 0-10% Ethanol.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 387
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
7
388 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component
Transmission
Rear Axle
Brake/Clutch Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use Castrol SAF-XJ/SAE 75W-140
Synthetic Gear and Axle Lubricant.
We recommend you use MOPAR Brake and Clutch
Fluid DOT 4 Motor Vehicle.
We recommend you use MOPAR Power Steering Fluid +
4, MOPAR or ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
▫ MAINTENANCE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
8
390 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
At Each Stop For Fuel
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this • Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent mainaccuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving. Inspection and service should also be done • Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
anytime a malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in- Once A Month
tervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months, • Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
whichever comes first.
damage. Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear,
even if it occurs before your next scheduled service.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
• Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 391
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake • Inspect the brake hoses.
master cylinder, power steering, and transmission, and
• Inspect the suspension components.
add as needed.
• Lubricate door hinges and check springs.
• Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.
• Check the engine coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
At Each Oil Change
• Check power steering fluid level.
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the exhaust system.
NOTE: Also, inspect the exhaust system if you notice a
change in the sound of the exhaust system, or if the
exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle.
8
392 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
150,000
42,000
30
70,000
144,000
36,000
24
60,000
138,000
30,000
18
50,000
132,000
24,000
12
40,000
126,000
18,000
6
30,000
120,000
12,000
Or Months:
20,000
114,000
6,000
108,000
Miles:
10,000
102,000
MAINTENANCE CHART
Change the engine oil and
engine oil filter.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Rotate the tires, rotate at the
first sign of irregular wear, even
if it occurs before scheduled
maintenance.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings;
replace if necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the exhaust system.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Change Brake Fluid
Adjust the parking brake on
vehicles equipped with four
wheel disc brakes.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
150,000
42,000
30
70,000
144,000
36,000
24
60,000
138,000
30,000
18
50,000
132,000
24,000
12
40,000
126,000
18,000
6
30,000
120,000
12,000
Or Months:
20,000
114,000
6,000
108,000
Miles:
10,000
102,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 393
Change the engine oil and
engine oil filter.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Change the manual transmission fluid.
Inspect the manual transmission fluid, add as necessary.
X
X
Change the rear axle fluid.
Inspect front suspension, tie
rod ends, and boot seals, for
cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if
necessary.
Replace the engine air cleaner.
Inspect and replace the PCV
Valve if necessary
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
8
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
150,000
42,000
30
70,000
144,000
36,000
24
60,000
138,000
30,000
18
50,000
132,000
24,000
12
40,000
126,000
18,000
6
30,000
120,000
12,000
Or Months:
20,000
114,000
6,000
108,000
Miles:
10,000
102,000
394 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Change the engine oil and
engine oil filter.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Replace the spark plugs **
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 120 months if not
done at 150,000 miles
(240,000 km).
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
monthly intervals do not apply.
X
X
X
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 395
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .399
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 䡵 MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .403
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .400
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. .403
▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . . . . .400
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401 䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .404
9
398 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 399
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder.
All work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
400 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- FCA US LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (855) SRT–TEAM
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 401
Mexico, D. F.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Service Contract
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
9
402 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 403
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
dealer, and the manufacturer.
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153),
operating at its best.
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: AdminREPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
MOPAR PARTS
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immeIf NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Transa group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
9
404 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acdiagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procomplete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,
and/or components is written in straightforward lan- cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety
tips.
guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 405
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforsafety requirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
9
406 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
408 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Adjust
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47, 49
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Air Bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69, 87, 151
Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .345
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348, 349
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355, 385
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
INDEX 409
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .134
Auxiliary Power Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263, 360
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263, 265
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360, 388
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . .264
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Bulbs, Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88, 382
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155, 346
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .23
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Saving Feature (Protection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . .385
Storing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
10
410 INDEX
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86, 307
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .339
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .75
Using The Top Tether Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .357
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354, 358
Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
INDEX 411
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . .355, 385, 386
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Dipsticks
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Door Ajar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Key Fob Emergency Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) . . . . . . . .134
Electric Remote Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .265
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .119
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
10
412 INDEX
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . .157
Emergency Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Emergency, In Case Of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .339
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354, 386
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86, 307
Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303, 385
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343, 385, 386
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343, 385
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344, 385
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86, 307
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86, 351
Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344, 386
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
INDEX 413
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88, 110, 169
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Fluid Level Checks
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360, 388
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362, 388
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260, 388
Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .386
Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303, 386
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303, 385
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . .125, 132
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
10
414 INDEX
Ground Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Headlights
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .110
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107, 115
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .110
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener). . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147, 154, 158, 169
Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .17
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .17
INDEX 415
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11, 20
Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Lane Change And Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88, 106
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69, 87, 151
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382, 384
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . .109, 110
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . .107, 115
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
10
416 INDEX
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .160
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .112
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382, 384
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . .164, 297
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88, 109, 110, 169
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .154, 169
Loading Vehicle
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Low Tire Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389, 390, 392
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .160, 339
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247, 363
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362, 388
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96, 97
INDEX 417
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
MOPAR Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341, 403
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343, 385, 386
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344, 386
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Materials Added To . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343, 385
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344, 385
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .4, 404
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Parking On Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
10
418 INDEX
Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Radio Frequency
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14, 17, 25
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Rear Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .17
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .17
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .357
Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .280
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .263
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .134
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259, 260
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Power Seats
Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .23
INDEX 419
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389, 390
Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Seat Belt
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .44
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .209
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87 Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88 Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35, 87
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35, 37, 40
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
10
420 INDEX
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 102
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98, 99, 101, 102
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Security Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17, 154
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Selection Of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
SENTRY KEY
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Shift Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247, 250
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88, 110, 169
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289, 290, 291
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
Speed Control
Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Emergency (Jump Starting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259, 260
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
INDEX 421
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .209
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag . . . . . . . . .47
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . . . . .279, 280
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88, 284, 289, 290, 405
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284, 289, 290
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279, 281
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272, 284
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289, 290, 291
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
Tire Service Kit . . . . . . .319, 320, 321, 323, 324, 327, 328
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311, 334
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .312
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .312
10
422 INDEX
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256, 257
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .268
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247, 250
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .23
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .23
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .20
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110, 169
Uconnect
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Voice Recognition
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . .
Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Siri Eyes Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
...
...
...
...
Uconnect Access
Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Uconnect Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Upholstery Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
. . . . .208 Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .17
Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217, 379
. . . . .239 Vinyl Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
. . . . .237 Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344, 385
. . . . .237 Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
INDEX 423
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Washers, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114, 351
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 114, 351
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®
16JC49-126-AA
16ZD-126-AB
©2015 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Dodge is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Second First
EditionEdition
Rev. 1
Printed in U.S.A.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising